Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 281

DataCbief 2060

User Manual

I PART

I SHIP NO.

I SHIP TYPE
HI038

43238
TEL.

3015

302.000 DWT CLASS CRUDE OIL CARRIER


SHIP NAME

SAMHO SHIP DESIGN DIVISION

NORDBAY

ELECTRIC OUTFITTING DESIGN TEAM

APPROVED BY

J.

W.

CHEON

CHECKED BY

S.

DRAWN BY

J.

H.
D.

LEE
YOON

TITLE

INSTRUCTION MANUAL
OF E. A. M. S (DC2000)
SCALE

..

&.

DWG NO.

6E32-6402(d)

Halla Engineering & Heavy Industries Ltd.


Samba Shipyard

DATE
1998.12.30.

CONSOLIDATED NO.

E-39 (d)

REV. NO.
F

.....
KONGSBERGflfORCONTROL AUTOMATION AS .
P.O. BQX l009 Bekkajordet. N-3194 Horten, Norway
Telephone: +47-33032000

---

Te!efax: +4733 04 22 50

ielex.: 79419 hcaul

LJoe.no. AU-OI1l912.J-Oet.-9.J

DataChief 2000

User Manllal

... I'; ; Appf,;ved by:

! ( f "
\' " ( ;/ (\:L~ C'-~

Ketil 0, Paulsen

'.-

Kje 11 Amesen

IYI.)5 Norcnntfol as
All rights reserwd
N" pomof this work cowred by the l'opyright
hereon may be reproduced or otherwise mpied

\vithuut prior pellllissinn from


NOfl'lIntrol as

: :LJ: :I: :I/: :a~C: :It: ie=.I: ' _::70::(:::~O=-::f::'()=r:::e:::w~'():::rd:::::================= ~

""""

Due.nu. AU-Ulii9 /2-1-0("1.-9-1

DOCUMENT STATUS
Issue Nil.

Date/Year
2c1-0ct.-'!cI

Ine. bv
KOP

Issue Nil.

OateNe;II'

Inc. b,

CHANla:s IN DOCUMENT
Iss lie
NIl.

ECO
No.

DaIllChi~O()U()-

Paragraph

No.

Forewurd

Paragraph Heading!
Descripti'"1 Ill' Chanue

=:::========================~oi~.!'l

ii

Vac.lw. AU-IJ/89 / N-Ocl.-9.J

FOREWORD

This System !\tmual prol'ides inftlnl1atitln ftlr C'lll1nissi'"1ing. Operating and Maintaining
the DataChief 2()(MI Alanl1. Mtlnittlring and C"ntrtll System.
Svstem L'nits which can be regarded as general-purptlse unirs (such as data acquisititln
units. printers. CCRTsi hal'e indi\idualm~lIlu~ils. and these are either supplied separatelY.
tlr relel'ant extracts are pro\ided in this manual.

1J(J/(JClli~"2IJIJIJ

- Fureword

=~==========================~~.!'1

VUC.IIU.

AU-U/89 /2.J-Ocl.-9.J

iii

UlNTENTS
This System M,mual is di"ided int<) the follnwing Chapters:
Chapter I:

SYSTEM
DESCRIPT)O~.(AU-(119(11 provides
a brief
introdul,ti"n. describes the functi"n "f the <,,'erall system. 'md
gives :.l sUlnmary of c:.lch Systelll unit. It also summaril.c"s systC'1ll
capabilities. and lists all the related N"rmntr,,1 publicati"ns,

Chapter 2:

OPERA TlNG INFORivlA TIO~.(AlI-e J 19 I) pn,,'ides all the


inf"nnati"n necessary f"r normal "perati<1I1al use "I' the system.
and refers t" subse4uent Chapters f"r "perati"n during System
C{lInmissitllling & Mainten:.uKc.

Chapter 3:

COI\'!J'vllSSIONING.(AU-1I!9,i) pnlvides or refers t". all the


inf"nnati"n necessary t" get the system fully "perati"nal after
installati"n,

Chapter 4:

ivIAINTENANCE.(AU-I 1104) provides "r refers to. all the


preventive maintenance int'"111ati"n that is necessary t" keep the
system in gOIM.I wllrking condititlll. :.llld provides fault finding
inftmll:.ltitll1.

Chapter 5:

REPLACEABLE PARTS.(AU-1I)05) pr"vides a list "I' all the


maj"r replaceable parts "f the DC 2111111 system,

Appendix A:

LOCAL AREA NETWORK.(AU-lIl %)


functi"nal descripti"n "f the network,

Appendix B

DCi'\,10N.(AU-1I1C,3) provides a sh"rt descripti"n "I' a simple


m"nit"ring system c"nnected t" the LAN collecting 'md

provides

brief

presenting alann- :.1lld countef-infonl1atin!1. TI,is monitoring

system may be used as an interface between the DataChief


system and "ther systems,
Appendix C

DC 2()1I(lPC.(AU-1I1197) pr"vides a functi"nal descripti"n "I' a


PC versi"n "I' the DC 2e 1111 ) System,

IJa1llChie{2111111 - Foreword

VUC.I/U. A [I.()/S9 12-IOcl.9.J

CHAPTER PA(;IN(; EXPLANATION


In this handb'HIK. each chapter begins nn a new page and is numbered as page Iltllllber I.

CHAPTER STRLCTL;RE EXPLANATJ<):\


Each seclinn. main paragraph and paragraph lerel is idelllified by numbers In make it
easier fnr ynu In idemify and Incate infnllnalinn easil\". 111is structure also helps In
nrganize the I<lwer level sub-sectinns. ell'. of infonnation.
For example:

Section
Main Paragraph
Paragraph

FJ<;lJRE AND TAHLE IIlENTlFlCATlO:'i


In this handb<H)k. each chapler begins a new series nf figure- and table-number. Each
Ilgure and table is numbered.

1J{/((JChi~O()()()

Furewurd

VOC.I/o. A [i-O/89! U-Oct.-9.J

"

TElU1S and AHHREVI,.\TIOillS


This is:J list of speL'ialterms ami abbreviations used in this

handb\Hl~,

Abbre\'iati\ lns

A
ACKN.
AUTO
COtvIMISS.
CPU
EMI
FSR
SAX
LED
mA
NO/NC
OP.CODE
PARAj\l
PRESS
RPfvl

Ampere
Ac ~n, '''' ledge
Aut, "natk'
Ctllllissillll

C cntr~1 Pn 'ccssing Unit

VAC
V DC
V
W

Elecrro Magnetic Interference


Full Scale Range
Signal AC4uisition Unit Extendedl
Light Emitting Diode
mi lliampere
Normally Open! Normally Closed
Operation Code or Operating Code
Parameter
Pressure
Revolutions Per !\linute
second
Volt:Jge Altemating Cun-em
Voltage Direct Cun-em
Volts or Voltage
Watt(s)

Adaptor

Term used by NI)('contful having the same meaning

as adapter

SERVICE CAUTION

Service work beytHld checking fuses. voltages and exchanging filter is nof recommendc'tl
without atrending a service course and/Ilr permission frol1l NOI"Ollllrul.

COllneL'ting .second hand e4uipment to the LAN. or installing pmgrams IHlt accepted by

Nnrl'(lnrrlll in the i'vlCU may damage your syqc"lll.


Please note that un4ualified attempts may result in loss of guarantee.
The customer is reminded that Norconrrol <lffers a wide r:Ulge of courses fur persunnel.

[)alllChie(2000 - Foreword

==~=============================~~.~

Voc.no. AUOIR9! 2-I-Ocl.9-1

VI

TARLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER I
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Sediun
D.-\nCHIEF ]()()(I- SYSTE~! DESCKII'11()N

Intn'duc!i,'n

Pl'KI'( lSE

2.:i.

Generdl Alarm Functi,'ns


AVdilable Ddw & System Control Fdcili(ies
In The I'vbchinery Spdce
In The Engine Control Room
On The Bridge
In The Engineers' QUdl1erS
Pn,cess C'lIltnll Func(i,ms

2
3
3
4
4
5
5

3.

I\I.-\(N SYSTHl FUNCT!()NS

3.1.
3.2.
3.2.1.
3.2.2.

hUrt lducti, \11


Alann System
Alann for A,whlgue Signdls
Alarm De(ectilln for On/Off (Two Swte) Sigmls
Inhibiting lIf Alanns
Alarm l'vlessdges from C'\lHrlll Systems
Alanll Functi,ms dnd Displays
Alarm Indication & Printout
Alann Ackn"wledge
S,'und Off
Alann Sunll11dry Display
Alarm History Display
Stdllllanl FlIIKti'lIls
Date & Time
System Inf'lfI11dtion Display
Functi, ms
Net C"mmunicdti,m
Limited Access Override
ocp Cllnligurdtitm
Stdti,m Inf'lI1ndti,m
Activate LlgS
Printer Respllnsi~le
Printer Set U p
Selected P"ints Ctmfigurdti,m
Selected PlIints Display

I.
1.1.

2.1.
11

2.2.1.
2.2.2.
2.2J.

2.204.

3.2..1.
3.204.
3.3.
3.3.1
3.3.2.
3.3.3.
3.3.4.
3._~.5.

304.
304.1.
3.4.2.
.'.4.2.1.
3.4.2.2.
3.4.2J.

3.4.204.
3.4.2.5.
304.2.0.

.'04.2.7.
.'A.2.S.
304.3.
3 AA.

ValaC"i~rl/)OO

Foreword

'" (,

X
X
X
X
S
lJ
lJ
I(I
I()
I(I
11
12
12
12
I.'
I.'
13
13
I'
14
15
15
10
1(,

====~==========================!:I.~.~

VUC.IIU.

_'A.5.

AU-OI1l9/2-1-0ct.9-1

S~kCl~d Tr~nd

l'ii

~A.II.2.

C"nfigurati"n
Di,pla\"
S~kCl~d Bargraphs C"nfigurati"n
S~kL'lt'd Bargraph, Di,play
Gnlup Di,play
Gn,up/Alann
Tag D~tail, Di,play
Tag D~taib Anal"gu~
Tag D~wil, Digiwl

.<.4.12.

C1~ar SLT~~n

~.5.

~.5.fi.

Ltlg FunctitlI1S
GnJUp L,'g
S~I~L'l~d P.,im, L,'g
.\utt1hl,g
Aut, llt'g Di,pby
:~.u{{lhlg Printtlut
Inhibit P"inr, L,'g
Ctllnpl~le L"g
Abnn Summary Lllg

4.

EXTENLJELJ ALARM ANLJ WACTH CALLING SySTEM

2K

4.1.

Inrn"lucli,'n
On the Bridge
Watch Bridg~ Unil Pan~I
In th~ Engineer" QuaJ1~r'
Watch Calling Unit Pan~1
In lhe Engine C"mrol R,,,,m
Operalllr Ctllllft,l Panel

2K

~vlt~lICS

~5

Imn"luL'li'lIl
Slandard Mimic DiagranK

~5

CusIlllnized Mimic Diagrams

~6

Remole Operalion "I' C"lltftllled Unit,


Standard Svmbols f"r Mimic',
f\nalllgue \,al\'c"s
On / Off valve,
Break~r' / Switche,
Pump, / Fan, / Compre,s"r,
Mi,c~llan~.,u' 'ymb,'b

<7
:lK

_''':+.6.
~A.7.

~.4.X.
~A.l).

.<.4.111.
."U.II.
~A.11.1.

~.5.1.

.<.5.2.

<.

~.5 ..

<.5.~.1.
.<.5.~.2.
~.5.4.

< ).).
-..

4.2.
4.2.1.

4.<.
4.3.1.
4.4.
4.4.1.

5.
5.1.
5.2.

5..<.
5A.
5.5.
5.5.1

5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4

5.5.5.

S~kL'l~d Tr~nd

17
17

IK
1K
19

21)
21
21
2<
2.<

14
24
24

15
25

15
2(,

26
27

2K

29
~1
~1
<~

'-<

<5

3X
<1)

411
41 I

41

6.

PR(lCESS OlNTRllL

4~

6.1.

IIltI't "lucri. In
Stand By Pump,
Valv~ C, ,lltn,l

4.<
44
45

6.2
6 ..<

VataChie(2000 - Foreword

=::::=======================~~.~

Voc.I/O. /tU-OIR9 / 24-0cl.-9.J

viii

6.4

6.5
6,(,

n.7
n.X
7.
7.1.

PID Ctllltrtll
Ct,mpressl,r C,lIltrtll
Puritier Clllltrtll
Btlilcr Clllltrtll
Pt IWer IVlanagmelH System

u,

SI'ECIAL FlINCTIlINS

52
52

7.7.1
7.7.2.

IlHrtlducritln
Deviati'lIl Parameter Ct1nfiguratil1n
CtlUlHers Display
Ct luntc-rs Lt 19
~tl{1I1 Lt}g
Fuel EO)llt1mizing S)"StCll1
Fuel ECtlt1<lmizing System Functitlnal Descriptitln
R'lUndtrip Reptlrt Pril1ltlut
Level Gauging and Vtllume Calculatitln
Level Gauging System
Trim- and/tlr List ctlrtectitln tlf tvlcasured Levcls
V"lume Calculatitlll
Tank Display and Ltlg
Ullage / Level Correctitln Displav and Ltlg
Ship Display
Ullage Gauging. Vtllume - and API Calculatitlns
Cargtl Tank Ullage Display and Ltlg
API Calculatilllls
API Display and Ltlg

X.

H.-\KlJWAKE SI'EClFlCATlllN

X.1.

Hardware Ctlllfiguratitln
PtlWer Cllllsumptilllls

n.

7.3.
1.3.1.
7.4.

7.5.
7.5.1.
7.5.1.
7.6.

7.6.1.
7.6.2.
7.6.3.
7.6.4.

7.6.5.
7.6.6.

7.7.
7.7.1.

X.2.
lJ.
lJ. I.

SYSTEM UNIT SU~t~IAKIES

lJX
lJ.lJ.
lJ. Ill.

"'lain Ctlmputer Unit (MCU).


Operator Ctlntrtll Panel (OCP)
Signal ACliUisititln Unit (SAU)
Level Gauging Unit (LGU)
Signal ACliuisititln Unit Extended (SAX)
Prtlcess Ctll1lrtll Unit (PCU) .. :
Generattlr Ctll1lrtll Unit (GCU I
Ptl\vcr Management Unit (PMU)
Watch Bridge Unit (WBU I
Watch Calling Cabin Units 'WCU)

Ill.

Et)UII'~tENTANlJ PURUC,-\TI'IN liST

1).2.

lJ.3.
lJ.4.

lJ.5.
lJ.6.
lJ.7.

J)ataChie.f2000 - Fureword

-17
-IX
4lJ
51 J

5.'
56
57
5X

5X
5X

6()
6I
6I
(, I
62
:

(,3
M

M,
6X
6X

6lJ
71l

72
72
73

74
74
74
74
75
7(,

77
XII

X2
XX
XlJ
lJ(J

===::::=======:::::::::::===============~~.!"l

ix

Vue. nu. AU-Of!/.9 /2-J-Oel.-9.J

CHAPTER 2
(lPERATlN(; INF( IRMATI< IN

I.
1.1.

D.-\T.~CHIEF

OI'EI<~ Tt 11<

2.1.
2.1.1.
1 1

2..'.
2.4.
2.5.

2.n.
2.7.
2.X.
2.<).
2.1 1I.
2.1 I.

~.1.

.'.2
~.~
~.3.1.

3.3.2.
.'.i ..'.
.~.3.4.

~.~.5 .

.~.4

:1.5.
.1.6.

.'.7.

'X
.i .9
4.

4.1.
4.2.
4.2.1.

4.2.2.
4.2 .."

4.2.4.
4.2.5.

21 J( III - OI'EI<.~ TING INFt >K~I.~ TIt 1N

I
I

Intn lducti, ln

C< 1NTI<t lL P~NEL


AI:mn System
Alarm Gn lUpS
Alarm FunctillllS and Displays
Watch Calling
Standard Fundi'lIls
LIlg FunctitlllS
Special FunctillllS
Mimics
C'"llnll Functi'lIls
Test Functi'"1S
Input Keys
Status
ALAI<M SYSTHt
Alarm and 'i\'lonitoring Displays
Alarm Grllup
Alanns
Alann for Analogue Signals
Alarm Detectillll for On/Off (Tw" State) Signals
Alann Detection f"r On/Off Signals with Line Check
Inhibiting tlf Alanns
Alann Indicatilln
Alann Events
.-\lam! Summary Display
Alarm Histllrv Display
Gn,up Display
Gnlup/Alafln TIlggle Display
Al'kn'l\\'kdge alanns

2
'
'
4
5
6
7
X
X
I)

Itl
I()
II
12
12
12
12
12

I~
I,
I,
14

15
1(,
IX
211

22
24

SnNDAI<U SYSTEM FllNCTlt 1NS


Date & Time
Svstem Inf!lrmati'l!1 Display

2(,
26
2X

Functit Ins

29

Net Cl lmmunicati, l!1


Limited Acce" Override
OCP Cll1figurati,lI1
Swtilln Infllnnatillll

21)
21)
21)

/)(JwChie(2000 - Foreword

,11

Voc.llo. A (i-Uf /19 /2.J-Ocl.-94

4.15.
4.16.

Activate Lt 'gs
Printer Respl msible
Printer Set Up
Selected P"ints Ctmfiguratitlll
Selected P"ints Display
Selected Trend Ct1nfiguratillll
SeleLted Trend Display
SeleLted Bargraph Clmfig
Selected Bargraphs Display
Tag Details Display
Tag Details Analt'gue
Tag Details Digital
Clear Screen
Selected P"ints L,'g
.<\u{()h'g
Inhibit P"ints Ltlg
Gnlup Lt'g
C,'mplete L,'g
Alann Summary Log

56
5X
61 I

5.
5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.

EXTENtJEtJ AL.-\RM ANtJ WATCH CALLING SYSTHI..


Change frtlm anendedttl unattended Engine Rtltllll
Ackntlwledgement tlf Alanlls when Engine RtHlm is unattended
Call Duty Engineer frtlm Br:dge
Call all Engineers frtlm Engine
Change frtlm unattendedltl attended Engine Rtltlm

62
66
70
7?
74
76

6.

PR( lCESS MIMiCS


Selecting Mimics
One Push Selectitlll
Mimic System Selectitln

XI I
XII
XI
XI

IvltMtC PR()CESS Ct)NTK(lL


hllnlductit'n
Standard MMI ftlr Prtlcess Ctllllrtll.
Analtlgue valves
On / Off valves
Breakers / Switches
Pumps / Ctlmpresstlrs / Fans
Single Pumps / Ctlmpresstlrs / Fans
Stand by Pumps / Ctlmpresstlrs / Fans
TWtl speed Pumps / Fans
Ct,ntnlllers
Generators

X2
X2
X4
X4
X(,

4.2A
4.2.7.
4.2.X.
4.3.
4A.
4.5.
4A
4.7.
4.X.

4.<).
4.<).1.
4.<).2.
4.10.

4.11.
4.12.

4.13.
4.14.

6.1.
6.1.1.
6.1.2.
7.
7.1.
7.2.
7.2.1

7.2.2
7.2.3

7.2.4
7.2.4.1
7.2.4.2
7.2.4..1.
7.2.5.

7.2.6.

VawCIlief 2UIJU - Foreword

11 I
11
11

32
34
36
1X

411

-12
-1-1
44
46
-IX
51)

52
54

XX

<)0
<)1 I
<)2
<)6
<)<)
IIn

[)UC./IU.

AU-UI89 / U-OcI.-9-1

XI

X.

SI'ECI.-\L FlCNeTlc lNS

III~

X.!.
X.2.

1(I~
1 I(I

x.:;.!.

IntrclLluCli'"1
Deviari'lI1 Parameter Configuration
CountCfS Dispiav
Coumers L,'g

XA.

i\lHH1 Ll'g

X.5.

Fuel El"<1I1omi/ing System


Le\'el Gauging and Volume Cakulati,"1..........
T'lllk Display and Log
Level Correcrion Display and Log
Ship Display
!.illage Gauging. Volume - and API Calculalions
Cargo Tank Ullage Display and Log
API Display and Log

X..i.

~.11.

I.
X.o.2.
~.li.

~.li.3.
~.7.

~.7.1.
~.7.1.

lJa/lIChi~r :WU(J

- Forewurd

III~

111
II-l

11 ()
11 ~
11 ~
1211
122
12-l
12-l
12li

Xli

VUC.I/U.

A UO/89 / U()ct.-9.J

CHAPTER J
Cl lM MISSH 1:\1:',(;

I.
1.1.

I:"TI lLJliCTI( IN
Rel'lled Manuals ft'r Ctlmmissitllling

I
I

2.

M.AL"Ctl~II'lITE/{ UNITI~ICU)

2.1.
2.2.

Checking the P"brity "f the MCU 24 V DC Input


MCLi P,'wer Switch
Stall up
ivhllherbt'ard Setllp
M"therbt 'ani i~X6-411
Mtllherbt'anl i4X6-."
Ethel11et Adapter B""nl setup
Single LAN
Dual LAN
I/O Seriallntert'ace 8: P"wer NA 111311 setup
Standard NA 111311
DualNA III~II

2
2

D.
2.4.
2.4.1.
2.4.2.

2.5.
2.5.1.
1
- 1
-.)._.

2.6.
2.6. I.

2.6.2.

5
5
5
6
6

6
X
X
lJ

III
I1I
III
1I

.~.5.

OI'E/{AT()/{O,NT/{(lL P.ANEL(OCP)
OCP PtlWer Switch
Checking The P"brity Of The OCp 24V DC Inpul...
Chech And Adjust. Of The + 5 V Dc Intel11al P"wer Supply Unit (pSU)
Switch-till
Status LED's

4
4.1.
4.2.
4~
4.4.

W.ATCH BKtLJGE UNIT


Checking The P"larity Of The WBU 24V DC Input
Switch-t 'n
WBlI Jumper Settings
WBU DIP-Switch Settings

14
14
14
14
15

5.
5.1.

WATCH CALLING UNIT


Chel'king The P"britv Of The WClI 24 V DC Inpllt
Switch-tlll
WCL! DIP-Switch 8: Jumper Settings

16
16

.~.

~.1.
~.2.
~.~.

~.4 .

5.2.
5.~

6.
(). I .
6.1.1.

6.1.2.

6.2.

MCU STAKTUI'
Running C1\'10S Set Up
Standard CMOS setup
T" exit (MOS setup
Running IvlCU Prepare

/){/taC"i~(2(j(j(j

. Fure ....ord

I~

I~

16

If)
IX
IX
It)
21
22

Doc.I/o. AU-U/89! 2.J-Ocl.-9.J

7.

INST.~lL.~ TIC)N of

7.1.
7.2.

linpdLk 2111 JlI.I.ip


UNZiP

X.

f..-ICU

X.1.
x.2.

DC -2111 III Sc )FT\\".~KE

2-1
2-1
2-1

D.~ nRASE Cc )KKECTI< )NS

InrnlL!uctil III

__

X.4.7.
X.4.X.
X.4.l).
X.4.IO.
X.4. I 1.
X.4.1 1.1.
X.4.II.2.
X.4.1 U.
X.4.II.4.
X.4.11.5.
X.4.II.h.
X.4.11.7.
X.4.II.X.
X.4.II.l).
X.4.1 1.111.
XA.II.II.
X.4.11.12.
XA.II.1.'.
XA.11.14.

On Line Ddtdbdse Chdnges


Off Line Ddtdbdse Changes
GENDAT
GENDB
The Different Ddwbdses
SHIP Ccmfigurdtic'n (SHIP.DAT).
SAU Ddtabdse Cnnfigurdtinn (SAU.DAT)
LGU Ddwbdse Cnnfigurdtion (LGU.DAT)
PCU Ddldb;J.se Configurdtion (PCU.DAT)
SYS DdWbdse Cnnfiguration (SYS.DAT)
SAU. GCU. PMU. LGU dnd PCU Ddwbdse Pdrameters
:
Au\(\I,'g C,mfiguratilm (AUTOLOG.DAT)
De..-idlion Configurdtion (DEV.DATI
Running Hours & Counters Contlgurdtion (RUN.DAT)
Regubtor Configurdtion (REG.DAT)
Tank System Configurdtion (TAi"K.DAT)
Generdl Inf,mlldticlIl
Vdlid Ddtdbdse Types
Trim- dllll/or List CIIrrection of measuredle\'c1s
Trim C,\rrecti'lIl
List C'\rrecti,lIl.
Elements in "##SHIP" t1dtabase in TAi"K.DAT file
Elements in "##DRAFT" Lbtdbase in TANK.DAT file
Elements in "##INDICATOR" lbtdbase in TANK.DA T.
Elements in "##TYPE API TANK" ,btabase in TANK.DAT file
Elements in "##TYPE TANK" database in TANK.DAT file
Elements in "##TANK" lbtdbaSe in TANK.DAT file
Elements in "##TRIM DATABASE" in TAN K.DAT file
Elements in "## CAPACITY" ddtabase in TANK.DAT file
Elements in "## HLB" t1dtdbdse in TANK.DAT file

l).
l).1.
l).2.
l).'.
l).4.
l).5.
l).h.
l).7.

ivlCU DAnRASE ELJIT( )K


Getting Started with the MS-DOS Editor
W'lrking with Menus
Wmking with Dialog Boxes
Quitting f..-1S-DOS Edi!<Ir.
Credting d Text File
i'vl,\\'ing the CufSllr
Selecting Text

X..i,
X.:i. I .
~U.2.

X.4.
XA.I.
XA.2.
X.4.3.
X.4.4.
X.4.5.
XA.h.

. DawChie.f2UOU - Foreword

XIII

25
2.5
25
25
25
25
25
211
27
2X

29
,11
i I
ill

,7
411
41

42
42
42

4,
44
44
45

4(,
47
47
4X
4X

5,
5,
54

SS
SS
SS
5(,
511
57
57
5X

==::::=::==~=================~~.~

Voc.no. A (!-IJ/89 / U-Ocl.-9.f

xiI'

9.X.
9,9,

9.1 (I.
9.11.
9.12.
9,1 J.

Editing Text
J'Vhl\'ing T~xt
Copying Text
Ckdring Text
M'Uldging Files
Saving a Filc-

VlIwCI1ief21J1J1J - f'oreword

:;X
5X

:;X
:'i')
:'ilJ
S9

==========================!:i~.~

VOC.1I0.

AU-O//i9/ J.J-Ocl.-9-1

XI'

CHAPTER ..
MAINTENANCE
I.

I~TI lLJUCTI( l~

PKE\E~TIVE M.AI~TENA~CE

2.1.

ivlCli Pr~\'~l1ti\'C Maint~nanl'~


OCP Pre\'Cl1ti\'~ Mail1t~nanl'~
OCP Lamp T ~st
WBU Pr~\'~l1ti\'~ Maint~nanl'~
WB U Lamp T~st
WCU Pr~\'~l1ti\'C Mail1t~nanl'~

I
2
3
5
5
5
(,
n
7
7
X
X
X

2.2.

2.2.1.

2..<.
2.3.1.
2.4.
2.4.1.
2.5.

~Ulwnp~~
SysI~m

2.n

T~st

2.7.

T~st

Alarm T ~st
of Bridge Call to Duty Engin~~r
of ECR Call All Engin~ers

2.X.

Print~r Pr~\'~ntive Mail1t~nanl'e

2.9.

C1~aning

3.
3.1
3.2
3.3

FAULT FINLJlNG
MCU Fault Finding
OCP Fault Finding
WBU Fault Finding
WCU Fault Finding

3.4

of Pan~ls and VDU Screen

9
l)

11
12
13

CHAPTER 5
REPLACEABLE PARTS

I.

INTK(lLJUCTI<lN

j\'I . \ J( H< UNITS

<

REO lMMENLJELJ SI'AKE P.AKTS

4.

PKOGK.AM-PACKAGES ON THE PKOCESSOK BO.AKLJ (OCP)

Va/aChief2UO/} - Foreword

Vue.nu. AU-Olli9 / 2-I-Oel.-9-1

APPE:\DIX A
LOCAL AIU:,\ ;\ETWORK

I.

l"wo[)lIen')"

..,

Fl;j'\Cll()~AL DESCKlI'TI()j'\

2.1
2.2
2.3

N~l\\"(lrk Int~grit\"

.2
2
2
2

S YSTnt

Cl )NFlGl'l<.~ n, l"S
81\ ICK Diagram f( lr System Cl lnfigurati\ 111

::;

LAN Ctlllllcctinn using I(IBASE2


IIIBASE2 inf<lnnati,lIl

-4

~.1
~.2

.3.2.1
3.2.2

Data Transf~r
N~tw<lrk S~curity

and

AL'c~ss

C<llllrlll

Unint~rnlptablc L"llIln~cti,lIl

4
5

APPENDIX B
D,\TACHIEF i\IONITORIN(;

I.

Fll~!eTI( )NAL DESCKtI'Ti<)N

1.1
1.2
\.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.3

hun"luL"li,'n
Funl"li'lIlality

I
2
::;
4
4
5
5
5

H'llk~y M~nu Fi~ld

Status Field
Display Field
Gunmand Line Opti,lIls
Environmelll Variables
Ern)r M~ssages

2.
2.1
2.2

SYSTE~1 REVlIIKHIE:\TS

S, 'ftware

7
7
7

DlSI'LA YS

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.(,
.3.(,.1
3.7

Grnup Display
Alann Gr<lUp Display
Alarm Hist"ry Displa\"
Alalln Summary Displav
Selected P<lillls Display
Tag Selcl"li<ln Display
Cust<lmizing the Tag SekL"lilln Menu
Running H<lurs Displa\"

Hardwar~

/)awChief2000 - Furewurd

X
l)
l)

II1
II
12
12
14

VOC./lo. AU()//i9 /2.J-Ocl.-9.J

4.
4. I

xl'ii

H( lST C< l~II'l;TER


Hosl

15
15

Al;T()~lAnC P()LLl~G

Scl~l"t

5.
5.1

S~kl"l Pol1l111~nal.

16
16

6.

I1\ST\LLATJ< l1\ Gl'IIJE

17

7.
7. 1
7.2
7..'
7.4
7.5

I~ST.\LLATIO~

X.
X.I
X.2

OF NETWORK

ENVIRO~MENT

COl1fig.Sys Fil~
AIl~rillg lh~ AUTOEXEC.BAT fik
Using Th~ Xirnlln POl"k~l Lan Adapla

IX
IX
IX
19
19
19

C< lNFlGl'RlNG THE NETWORK

211

N~l\\"l Irk Adapt~r.

pcn CP N~lwork Sl,fl\\"ar~


All~rillg Th~

ENVI!{ON~lENT

Ch~l"killg/Changil1g Th~ Int~m~l Addr~ss

21l

S~((ing Th~

211

X."1,

Hosl Tabl~
Updming HOSl Tabl~s

9.
9.1

DISK L(lGGING F()!{M.\T


AlJmlpllilllS Tag

Fil~ Nam~

211
21

9.1.1

H~ad~r lin~s

n
n

9.1.2
9.2
l).2. I

AlJnnpoil1l infonnation
AlJnn History Tag
AlJnnpoil1l infonnatiol1
Running H"urs
Runninghllurs informatilll1

D
2'
24
25
25

1)."1,
9."1,.1

APPENI>IX C
DATACHIEF 2lHHI PC

I.
I. I
1.2
1.2.1

SI'EClFIC.\TJ<)NS
G~Il~ral

Funl"lillnality
Emulation Of OCP With Funl"liol1

1
1
2
'

.
.
K~\'s.........................

'1

SYSTE~l REVUIKE~lE;'\TS .. _.. _...........................................

2.1

Hard\\"ar~

2.1

S{lft\Vare

4
4

.1.

FUNCTH)NS

"1,.1
:i.2

Alarm Gn'ups
Abnll H~.lI1dljl1g FUIlUiIHlS

4
_:'

========================.ii.. ~li:
LJ{l{(JChi~f2()()() -

Foreword

..

Xl'iii

.i.3

.:;A
:lA. I

J)uc./lu. A [I-U/89 / 2-/-()c(.-9.J

& i'vlimics
& Pnlccss Ctll1lrt,!
Cursllr I11tll'el1lcl1t and Cl >l1lrt ,I
i\lisc.

FUIll'tiIlIlS

~lil1liLs

J)a(aChie.t'2UUU - Fureword

Cl
(,

======================~~.~

Vuc.nu. AV-OI8912.J-Ocl.-9.J

xix

LIST OF FIGURES
CHAPTER I
SYSTEM DESCRIPTIO:"
Figlln~

Operatllr C,lIHrlll Panel


Watch Bridge Unit (WBU I
Watch Calling Unit (WCU I.
Watch-calling at the OCP in Engine C,lIltrol RIHlIll

Fig.
Fig. )
,
Fig. ,
Fig. 4

6
2')
' 1
'.'

CHAPTER 2
OPER.ATlN<; INFORMATION

CHAPTER J
COMMISSIONIN< ;
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

Fig.
Fig.

Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

Fig.

MCU Power Switch


il.1CLI Start up - I
~ MCLI Start up - 2
4 MCLI Start up - ,
5 M,)therb, lard i~X6-4( I
n MIltherbllard i4X6-~~
7 Single LAN ethemet adapter boanl..
X Dual LAN ethemet adapter board (net A)
l} Dual LAN ethemet adapter board (net B)
III Standard NA 11),1)
11 Dual NA 11I:1() (board I )
12 Dual NA 111:11) (board 2)
I~ OCP Pmver Switch
14 OCP power tel111inal X-Ill
15 OCP vI)hage adjustment
16 WBU 24Y ulnneeti,lll
17 WBU jumper settings
IX WBU DIP-switL'h settings
II) WBU 24V connection
211 WCU DIP-switch and jumper settings

2
~

VaIl/Chie(2UUO. Forewurd

'
4
5
5
6
7
7
X
l)
l)

III
I(I
I1
14
14
15
16
16

========================~~.!'I

xx

Vuc./lU. A[I-011l9/ U-Ocl.-94

CHAPTER

:\1.-\ I:\T E:\ A:\ C E

Fig.
Tighten \-ICU terminals ~U1d plugs
Fig. 1 Tighten OCP tenninal (X !O)
Fig. .' OCP "oltage adjustmelll
Fig. 4 OCP Lamp Test
Fig. :; Tighten WBU tenninals
Fig. 6 WBU Lamp T est
Fig. 7 Tighten WCU tenninals
Fig. X WCU Lamp Test
Fig. lJ Svstem Alarm Test
Fig. 1fI Test of bridge L'all to duty engineer
Fig. 11 Test of ECR call all engineers
Fig. 12 IvlCU Card position
Fig. I.' IvlCU Connections
Fig. 14 OCP Board position
Fig. 15 WBU Board position
Fig. 16 WCU Board position

2
'

,
:;
:;
:;
6
6
7
7
X

lJ
III

II
12

I,

CHAPTER 5
REPL\CEAIlLE PARTS
Fig.

Layout of Prucessor Board NN-7lJ I . I 2

APPENDIX A
LOCAL AREA NETWORK
Fig. 1 DataChief 2f1IXI Alann and Moniroring System Configurati,m

Fig. :2 Node Ctlnncctitll1 tu LAN

Fig. , Unilllerruptabk NOlk C\)(lIleL'tion

V{/laC"i~r2000

- Foreword

[0

LAN

:;

LJue.lw. Al'Olil9 / ].JOel.-9-1

XXI

APPE:"I>IX R
IJATAUIIEF ~I():"IT()I<I:"(;

Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

DC IIIIIII/DC 21 MII I and DC Monitoring


:2 SCfcc-ll pdJliritll1s
'Gn1up Displa\
4 Alarm Group Display
5 Alann Histor\ Display
6 Alarm Summary Dispby
7 S~kClcd Poillls Dispby
X Tag Sdel'lion Display
\) Tag S~kction \knu
III Sekct Tag Pop-up Menu
11 Running Hours Display
12 Selcl'l H,"'t
I:; Sdect Poll llller\'all
14 Alannp,'illls 1<lg
15 Alarm His{(lry Ltlg

Fig.

}<1

Fig.

Fig.

S\SI~m

Runningh(lUrS log

2
X
\)
\)
III
11
12
12
\.'
14
15
16
22
2.~

25

APPENI>IX C
DATACHIEF 2111111 PC
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

:;
4
5
6

PC & DC 21 MIII in network


The Operator Contwl Panel Fields
Funeti, \11 keys I
Funeti, H1 keys 2
Abnn Gnlups
i lise. Funeti'''1s & Mimies

LJalaChie(2000 Furewurd

1
:;
4
4
5
6

XX/I

Voe.l/o. AUUI//9 / UOel.9.J

(I11l~ti()mlly kft

Vll/{/Chi~{2UUU

Foreword

bbnk)

==========================.-r.. ~ ..,..

------------_. - - -

Doe.no. AU-OI90-A I 24-0el-94'

DataChief 2000

System Description

User Manual

DePartmentJAUth~

JId1t :v L

Ketil O. Paulsen

Kjell Amesen

1994 Norcontrol a<;


All rights reserve d
No part of this work covered by the copyright
hereon may be reproduced or otherwise copied
without prior permission from
Norcontrol as

:D: a: la: C: h: ifie::2:o0::0::-:S::Y:Sl:::em:=D:e:se::n::'p:li:::on============~

Doe.no. AUOI90A I 240et94

DOCUMENT STATUS
Issue No.
A

DatelYear
24-0ct-94

Inc. by
KOP

Issue No.

DatelYear

CHANGES IN DOCUMENT
Issue
No.

ECO
No.

Paragraph
No.

Paragraph Heading!
Description of Change

Inc. bv

ii

Doc.no. AUOI90A I 240ct94

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section

l.
1.1.

Page

DATACHIEF 2000 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Introduction

2.

PURPOSE

2.1.
2.2.
2.2.1.
2.2.2.
2.2.3.
2.2.4.
2.3.

General Alarm Functions


Available Data & System Control Facilities
In The Machinery Space
In The Engine Control Room
On The Bridge
In The Engineers' Quarters
Process Control Functions

2
3
3
4
4
5
5

3.

MAIN SYSTEM FUNCTIONS

3.1.
3.2.
3.2.1.
3.2.2.
3.2.3.
3.2.4.
3.3.
3.3.1
3.3.2.
3.3.3.
3.3.4.
3.3.5.
3.4.
3.4.1.
3.4.2.
3.4.2.1.
3.4.2.2.
3.4.2.3.
3.4.2.4.
3.4.2.5.
3.4.2.6.
3.4.2.7.
3.4.2.8.
3.4.3.
3.4.4.
3.4.5.

Introduction
Alarm System
Alarm for Analogue Signals
Alarm Detection for On/Off (Two State) Signals
Inhibiting of Alarms
Alarm Messages from Control Systems
Alarm Functions and Displays
Alarm Indication & Printout
Alarm Acknowledge
Sound Off.....................................................................................................
Alarm Summary Display
Alarm History Display
Standard Functions
Date & Time
System Information Display
Functions
Net Communication
Limited Access Override
OCP Configuration
Station Information
Activate Logs
Printer Responsible
Printer Set Up
Selected Point~ Configuration
Selected Points Display
Selected Trend Configuration

6
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
10
I0
10
II
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
13
14
IS
15
16
16
17

DataChiej2000. System Description


..'

Doe. no. AU0/90A /240ct-94

ill

3.4.6.
3.4.7.
3.4.8.
3.4.9.
3.4.10.
3.4.11.
3.4.11.1.
3.4.11.2.
3.4.12.
3.5.
3.5.1.
3.5.2.
3.5.3.
3.5.3.1.
3.5.3.2.
3.5.4.
3.5.5.
3.5.6.

Selected Trend Display


Selected Bargraphs Configuration
Selected Bargraphs Display
Group Display
Group/Alarm
_
Tag Details Display
Tag Details Analogue
Tag Details Digital
Clear Screen
Log Functions
Group Log
Selected Points Log
Autolog
Autolog Display
Autolog Printout
Inhibit Points Log
Complete Log
Alarm Summary Log

4.
4.1.
4.2.
4.2.1.
4.3.
4.3.1.
4.4.
4.4.1.

W ACTH CALLING SYSTEM 28


Introduction
28
On the Bridge
28
Watch Bridge Unit Panel
29
In the Engineers' Quaners
31
Watch Calling Unit Panel
31
In the Engine Control Room
33
Operator Control Panel
33

5.

MIMICS

5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.5.5.

Introduction
Standard Mimic Diagrams
Customized Mimic Diagrams
Remote Operation of Controlled
Standard Symbols for Mimics
Analogue valves
On / Off valves
Breakers / Switches
Pumps / Fans / Compressors
Miscellaneous symbols

6.

PROCESS CONTROL 43

6.1.
6.2
6.3
6.4

Introduction
Stand By Pumps
Valve Control
PID Control

17
18
18
19
20
21
21
23
23
24
24
24
25
25
25
26
26
27

EXTENDED ALARM AND

DataChie! 2000 System Description

Unil~

35
35
35
36
37
38
38
39
40
40
41
43
44
45
46

~
~.!I

iv

Doc.no. AU0190A / U-Oct94

6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8

Compressor Control
Purifier Control
Boiler Control
:
Power Managment System

47
48
49
50

7.
7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.3.1.
7.4.
7.5.
7.5.1.
7.5.1.
7.6.
7.6.1.
7.6.2.
7.6.3.
7.6.4.
7.6.5.
7.6.6.
7.7.
7.7.1.
7.7.1
7.7.2.

SPECIAL FUSCTIOSS

Inrroduction
Deviation Parameter Configuration
Counters Display
Counters Log
Noon Log
Fuel Economizing System
Fuel Economizing System Functional Description
Roundtrip Repon Printout
Level Gauging and Volume Calculation
Level Gauging System
Trim- and/or List correction of Measured Levels
Volume Calculation
Tank Display and Log
Ullage / Level Correction Display and Log
Ship Display
Ullage Gauging. Volume - and API Calculations
Cargo Tank Ullage Display and Log
API Calculations
API Display and Log

52
52
53
56
57
58
58
58
60
61
61
61
62
63
64
66
68
68
69
70

8.
8.1.
8.2.

Hardware Configuration
Power Consumptions

HARDW ARE SPECIFlCA110S

SYSTEM U~1T SUMMARIES

72
72
73

9.
9.1.
9.2.
9.3.
9.4.
9.5.
9.6.
9.7.
9.8.
9.9.
9.10.

Main Computer Unit (MCU)


Operator Control Panel (OCP)
Signal Acquisition Unit (SAU)
Level Gauging Unit (LGU)
Signal Acquisition Unit Extended (SAX)
Process Control Unit (PCU)
Generator Control Unit (GCU)
Power Management Unit (PMU)
Watch Bridge Unit (WHU)
Watch Calling Cabin Unit~ (WCU)

74
74
74
74
75
76
77
80
82
88
89

10.

EQUIPMEST ASD PUBLlCATIOS LIST.

90

DataChie/2000 System Description

Doe.no. AU-O/90-A /24-0et-94

LIST OF FIGURES
Section
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

I
2
3
4

Page

Operator Control Panel.


Watch Bridge Unit (WBU)
Watch Calling Unit (WCU)
Watch-calling at the OCP in Engine Control Room

:D: : Q:tQ:C:h:ief::2:o:00::-:sy:s:te:m=D:e:se:n:'p:ti:o:n============~

6
29
31
33

Doc.no. AU-0190-A /24-0ct-94

1.

DATACHIEF 2000 - SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

l.l.

Introduction

The DataChief 2000 is an alarm monitoring. data acquisition and control system. The
system adopts NORCONTROL's Unified Automation Concept. where configuration is
designed by standard modules communicating on serial instrument net and local area
network. It is adaptable for all types of ships. e.g. tankers. bulk carriers. cruise vessels.
container ships. reefers and other special purpose vessels.
The "DataChief-2000" complies with the requirements of IMO. local marine authorities
and classification societies for computerized systems on board ships.
The modular concept of "DataChief-2000" allows flexibility in system architecture.
covering a range from alarm systems of low complexity to highly integrated alarm and
monitoring systems with advanced process control.
The main purpose of the system is to give ship's officers all the ba5ic alarms and status
information they require in order to maintain safe and efficient operation of the machinery.
The system is designed to meet the classification society's requirements for periodically
unmanned engine room operation. The design conforms to all rules and regulations. and
all modules are type approved.
The "DataChief-2000" is NORCONTROL's registered trademark for Integrated Alarm.
Monitoring and Control System.

DataChie/2000 - System Description

2.

Doc.no. AU0190A L24-0ct.94 _....

PURPOSE

DataChief 2000 Alann Monitoring and Control System is a Microprocessor-ba~ed system


designed to provide the ship's officers with all the basic alarm anti status information they
require to maintain safe and efficient operation of the machinery. especially when
unmanned.
The "DataChief-2000" processing units are designed for local installation, and each unit
has individual display and mini-keyboard for back-up operation.
The Remote Operator Stations features full colourgraphic displays and functional
operators panels. Man-machine interface includes both standard anti customized mimics
with direct addressing and control by trackerball operation.
NORCONTROL's "DataChief-2000" local area network allows interface with personal
computers for remote monitoring and with other external computer based systems.
Full monitoring and a1ann facilities are provided both in the machinery space and in the
Engine Control Room (ECR).
Sufficient facilities are also provided for machinery watch on the Bridge, and a Watchcalling subsystem enables engineers to be automatically called to the ECR when they are
on watch-call duty in their quarters.
Thus, both the machinery and the ECR may safely be left unmanned, while machinery
watch is carried out on the Bridge.
An operator control panel with tracker ball and functional push-buttons/lamps is
connected to every workstation. The databa~e holds several standard pictures for display
of common infonnation from the engine and the ancillary equipment, provided that the
functions are included in the delivery. Remote operation of local control units can be
perfonned from the Remote Operator Stations.

The DC 2000 is comprised of standard items which can easily be configured to suit any
type of machinery. System functions and operation is described briefly below.

2.1.

General Alarm Functions

Machinery status sensors are monitored by Acquisition Units like Signal Acquisition Unit
(SAU), Signal Acquisition Unit Extended (SAX) or Level Gauging Unit (LGU). These
units are capable of monitoring 32 analogue or digital sensors each (SAU or LGU) or 32
analogue or digital sensors and 256t1igital sensors (SAX).
Each acquisition unit contains a microprocessor and is programmed to detect when the
status of its monitored signals becomes unacceptable for the safe or efficient operation of
the ship's machinery. It also inhibits unwanted a1anns during, for example, start-up and

DataChief2000 System Description

.::

Doc.no. AU-0190-A / U-Oct-94

shut-down of the machinery. Status infonnation is continuously monitored by the DC


ZOOO's Main Computer Unit (MCU) via a common communication loop.
When an unacceptable condition is detected. the Acquisition Unit~ and DC ZOOO
generates. all- alarm signal. identifies the responsible machinery sensor. and provides
infonnation about the condition.
The data received by the MCU is filtered and selectively distributed to the CCRT. Printer.
Operator Control Panel (OCP). Bridge and to the EngineerS' Quaners ( Cabin. mess,
Dayroom).
An alarm signal received by the MCU causes both visual and acoustic alarm indications.
The MCU automatically sends a general alarm signal to the Machinery Space, the Bridge.
and, if the Watch-calling system is enabled. to the Engineers' Quaners. This signal also
generates both visual and acoustic alarm indications.

The alarm data available in addition to the general alarm signal. plus the normal-status
data and the system control facilities, are summarised below.

2.2.

Available Data & System Control Facilities

When an alarm occurs, the general alarm signal is distributed as described above. The
following text summarises the available data and the system control facilities provided at
the various locations.

2,2.1.

In The Machinery Space


Detailed infonnation on the type of alarm and its source, is available at the Acquisition
Unit that originated the general alarm signal. In addition, detailed infonnation about the
normal status of the machinery monitored by the Acquisition Unit is always available at
the unit.
If an Acquisition Unit is isolated from the rest of the system by a communication breakdown, or the MCU develops a serious fault, all the necessary alarm and monitoring
functions nonnally associated with the machinery monitored by the Acquisition Unit, are
available locally at the Acquisition Unit.
An alarm is automatically generated if an Acquisition Unit becomes isolated. Options
allow individual Acquisition Units to provide centralised visual and acoustic alarm signals
to indicate nonnal alarms if they become isolated.

The Acquisition

Unit~

can thus provide full back-up facilities.

DataChie! 2000 System Description

Doe. no. AU-O/90-A /24.-0cz-94 ,

2.2.2.

In The Engine Control Room

As soon a~ an Acquisition Unit detects an alarm condition. the alarm is identified by a


flashing indicator on the OCP. the alarm is displayed at the CCRT. a buzzer sounds. and
the Alarm Logging Printer automatically writes out the alarm details. By pressing the
flashing indicator on theOCP. more detailed alarm information is displayed on the CCRT.
Detailed information related to any sensor connected to an Acquisition Unit. concerning
alarm or normal status data. can also be shown on the CCRT. or written out on the
Logging Printer, on demand. Any analogue sensor may be presented as a Bargraph or a
Trendcurve. Selected sensors may be logged automatically at a fixed time interval on the
printer. The system is able to display a number of the latest alarms or all currently active
alarms.
The Logging Printer and CCRT record all status changes, for example alarm
acknowledgement and alarm condition cleared. and when all alarm conditions have been
cleared the system returns to normal.
Alarm limits and delays are adjustable from the OCP.
A counter function is provided to keep track of running hours for engines. pumps and
related items. This function is also capable of accumulating flow. The counter values may
be shown on the CCRT or printed at the Logging Printer.
Selection of engineers for watch-call duty is carried out at the OCP. and all available
engineers, whether on duty or not, may be called to the ECR in the case of an emergency.
Machinery Watch responsibility may be changed from the ECR to the Bridge. and back to
the ECR.

2.2.3.

On The Bridge

Facilities are provided for indicating and accepting the transfer of Machine Watch
responsibility to/from the Bridge.
When the Bridge is on machine watch, one or more engineers must be on call, and the
general alarm signal previously described will call them to the ECR if an alarm condition
arises. The visual alarm data on the Bridge panel consists of single or group alarm
indicators. When an alarm is acknowledged in the ECR. or cleared, appropriate
indications are given on the Bridge panel. Note that the DC 2000 system prevents the
Brirlge from a~suming watch responsibility if there are no engineers on watch-call duty.
The Bridge personnel may call the engineers on-duty from their quarters at any time, for'
consultation etc.. and an indication of the acknowledgement of such calls is provided.
If the Bridge personnel are not on machinery watch, alarm indications can still be
provided. and indicators show when an alarm has been acknowledged in the ECR.

DataChiej2000 - System Description

Doe.no. AU-0190-A 124-0e'-94

2.2.4.

In The Engineers' Quarters

The alarm indication is presented in the same way in the Engineers' Quaners and the
Bridge panel.
If an engineer has been assigned to'on-call dury(from the ECR). the alarm signal will
cause a buzzer to sound and a lamp to light. both in his cabin and in the general quaners.
He would then normally go to the ECR to fmd the cause of the alarm. If he does not
acknowledge within a specified time. the alarm signal is repeated in the Engineers'
Quaners. and on the Bridge. until he does acknowledge it.

Similar indications (buzzer and lamp) are provided to call an engineer to the Bridge or the
ECR when no alarm conditions exist.

2.3.

Process Control Functions

Machinery control functions are performed by Control Unit~ like Process Control Unit
(PCU). Generator Control Unit (GCU) or Power Management Unit (PMU).
The PCU is a mUlti-purpose computer unit for control and monitoring of different kinds of
equipment located in the propulsion plants. cargo-control plants and other ancillary plants
of maritime vessels.
The GCU provides complete monitoring. alarm and control facilities for a single
generator. In addition. GCUs can communicate with each other to provide a fully
automatic power management system for a generating plant of up to ten (10) generatingsets.
The PMU performs control of the total power generation and distribution of the ship. It
includes all the automatic functions necessary for safe and economic operation of the
power plant.
Operator interactions with the Control Units are primarily done from a Remote Operator
Station. but local interactions from their local panels are possible whenever necessary.

:D:a:,:aC: : :h:i1e::2:o:00:::-:s:y:s:te: m: : D:e: sc:n:'p:'::iO:n:::::=============~

Doe. no. AUOI90A / 2!J~f)ct-94

3.

MAIN SYSTEM FUNCTIONS

3.1.

Introduction

....,,,...

The NORCONTROL Remote Operator Station consists of four units: a main computer
unit. an operator control panel. a graphical display and a printer. The Station serves four
different tasks in an alarm, monitoring and control system.
I. Receiving and sending data from local acquistition units and process control units on a
serial instrument network.
2. Presentation and monitoring of alarm information with acknowledge functions.
3. Extension of the alarms to the bridge and to the engineer on watch while in unmanned
condition.
4. Acting a~ a gateway to the local area network.
To enable the user to operate the system. different functions are provided. The interface
between the operator and the ROS is accomplished by graphical displays and a control
panel.
The operator control panel (OCP) is a dedicated functional keyboard with illuminated
push buttons for direct activation of functions. One push will normally activate one
function together with one display, avoiding time consuming dialogues.
If control functions are included, the panel is equipped with a tracker ball for selecting
control objects on the display. The start/stop or open/close (I / 0) buttons may then be
activated.

.........,...

Orn[!]OO~

~~~~
~OO~O
ISJ~~~
1.iJ~~~

eJ01;;l1Sl
(~O
~J~

ou@6t!N

@)@)~~

~~~~

.m,,,,,,
~~g)~

~~~~
S)@lEl ~~~~
El~~~ [iJ~~~
~)fgj~ OO~~
1aI~~~ El@@~
J@]@ 8~OO~
~@)~~

'.

CD@]O@)

III ~ [jl mm ~ III


(F(llAitJIl CQIromoL PAI\Il.

Fig. I Operator Control Panel

DataChiej2000 System Description

0008
0000
8008
8008
801I10
E1El0B

CD0CDG

0
(

Doc.no. AU-O/90-A 124-0ct-94

The panel is divided into different columns and groups as shown below.
Groups are shown offset from their nonna! placing on the OCP for the purpose of
distinguishing them.

Standard Functions

Control Functions

~][E~ ~

~~~~B~~~
r='I~lr=1I~ O~~~

~~~~O~~~

Alarm FunClions
and Displays

Log Functions

Test Functions

Tracker Ball

~]@] ~@:)[!]~

This Section of the Manua! will briefly describe the following groups:
Alarm System
Alarm Functions and Displays

3.2
3.3

DataChiejZOOO - System Description

Standard Functions
Log Functions

3.4
3.6

Doc.no. AU-0190-A I 244Jct-94 .

3.2.

Alarm System

3.2.1.

Alarm for Analogue Sigl)als

The

following functions are included:


Instrument failure alarms
Low-low process alarms with action (Shut-down)
Low process alarms
High process alarms
High-high process alarms with action (Shut-down)
Return to normal detection with dead-band to avoid alarm fluctuations
Adjustabl ~ filter factors to avoid fluctuations in the incoming signals
Time delay of alarm triggering and rerum to normal messages

3.2.2.
Alarm Detection for OnlOff (Two State) Signals
The following functions are included:

Low process alarms

High process alarms

Return to normal detection

Time delay of alarm triggering and rerum to normal messages


Inhibiting of Alarms
3.2.3.
Some of the alarms are conditional and will be inhibited when a specified condition is
present This function is realised by defining a signal as an inhibit signal for a specified
alarm or a specified group of alarms. It is possible to define the inhibit signals both locally
and in the control room.
An adjustable time delay for each signal is available to extend the inhibit situation.

Alarm Messages from Control Systems


3.2.4.
The control and logic functions performed by the process control. generator control and
data acquisition systems will generate a number of defmed alarm messages that is
presented as ordinary alarms both locally and in the central control room.

DataChiej2000 - System Description

Doe.no. AU-0190-A 124-0et-943.3.

Alarm Functions and Displays

3.3.1

Alarm Indication & Printout

Any alarms detected by the system will be indicated in the lower right corner of the VDU.
The alarm tag. description and state will be displayed. Following states are used by the
system.
Alarm State
On/Off signal Open Alarm:
On/Off signal Closed Alarm:
On/Off signal Broken Alarm:
On/Off sional Short Alarm:
Analogue signal Instrument Failure
Signal value outside Low range:
Analogue signal Instrument Failure
Signal value outside Hjgh range:
Analogue signal High Alarm:
Analogue signal Low Alarm:
Analogue signal High-High Alarm:
Analogue signal Low-Low Alarm:
On/Off or Analogue sensor taken out of scanning:
On/Off or Analo!!ue si!!nal Return from Alarm:

Text
OPEN
CLOSED
BROKEN
SHORT

IFL
[FH

HIGH
LOW
HI-HI
La-La
OFFSC
RETURN

To visually distinguish between the alarm states in the Alarm History -. Alarm Summai') and Group - Display. different colors have been used. The meaning of the different colors
is listed below:
States
Normal state:
Alarm state, not acknowledged:
State changed from not acknowledged alarm to normal
Alarm state. acknowledged:
Alarm state. inhibited:
All changes in alarm state will be
will be printed:
Date
Time
Tagname
Tag description
Value
Alarm state

li~ted

Color
GREEN
RED
RED
YELLOW
BLUE

at the alarm log printer. Following information

A sample of an alarmlist is provided on next page.

:D:a:la:::C:h:::i:ef:2:0:0:0:-:s:y:s:te:m=D:e:::se:n~'p::t1::'o:n=============~

Doc.no.. AU-0190-A f24-0ct-94

10

ALAR\1 LIST FOR


Dale
Time

~1,s

94--01-20
94--0)20
9.s-0120

12:08:12
12:08:1-1
12:08:22

CWOOI
MEOOl
MPOOl

9.s..0120

12:08:53

MGOl2

94--0120

12:09:10

GEOO~

3.3.2.

1<ORCOSll\OL AUTO~lATIOS At->

EAGLE
Tagname

Tag De:scription

Func

Value

DIFF P.lSLETIOUTLET CYU,DERS


MJE SO. I CYL EXH GAS OUT TEMP
MIE F 0 IS PRESS
WE Fa j); VISCO HIGH
PREFERE1<CE TRIP

DPIAH
TlAH
PIAL
XA
XA

HIGH
HIGH
LOW
OPE:"

OPE:O-:

!lC2000
AIann
ALAR\1
REl1JRN

ALAR\1
ALAR\1
RETIJRN

Alarm Acknowledge

The alarm acknowledge functions allow acknowledgement of separate and the group
alarms apparent on the screen, by one push. It is possible to acknowledge alarms while a
mimic display, an alarm group display or an alarm summary display is active.

3.3.3.

Sound Off

When an alarm occurs the alarm buzzer in the OCP is activated. External devices like
rotating light and horn is also activated if connected. Pressing the "Sound Off' bunon will
deactivate these alarm indicators.

3.3.4.

Alarm Summary DisplaJ'


NORro"'IROL
A'IltIIlUlri""

T.,.1lIlI'
GBOOI
08002

G''''
G'''''
G''''
0800.

,OO"
,OO"
""'"

""'''
""'"

U>OOOo
""""
""'"
""""
l.OOJO

ALARM SUMMARY

IIOS9J

PAGE IOF}

12:30:16
v,,~

loa ckKIlpt.l"ll

Foo"

GEAR SEJtv OD.. CO-1.ET rRESS

,"'-

'M

D''''
"'"
,,'"

'"

QEA.Il. l.O ll'o'DlC.l LOW PRESS

DEAlt LO f1l:n:ll Dlf.I'RESS


GEAR THRL:ST BEARI!'G TEMP.
GEAIl. LO HIGH TEMP.

,"'-

QEAR8.LOSTARTST.BYPt.IM:P AX

ME OIL MIST DETCCTOR


MEWS OlLDlF.PRF5S FILT,
ME LUB OlL HIGH TEMP

AX
PO'"

"'H

ME WB OlL STAAT ST ,8Y PUMP 1<..:'(


DIRTY LL'B OlL ne ~P
'-"ME WB OlL SYSTEM TK ~:c
'-"STCR.<.:TtJBE GRAV. Ll.'B OlL n: v.L
Sl"EA.'IITt1BE l:"l'o"1'Jl. 8EAJl., TEMr'TWi
LUB.OlL SEPARATOR FALloT
AX
~,
MEPRE.LUB,OlL l.OW PRESS

Ilco.OO
IkJ,l)(l

",,,,m

'00

Eag. uit

'AA
'AA
DEGC
DECl.C

"'GH

""

DB> C

"""m

"'",'"
"'",'"
l,."l.OSED
.00

DEGC

L__ Ii.m.

Al~

LOW

...

(
(
(
(
(
(
(

(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(

I Ill.

,"'.

OPEN

."00
."00
,OPEN

OPEN

,opa-;
,is 00
,OPEN
,OPEN
,OPEN
,OPe.'
,!>$,OO
,OPe.'

'"
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

,ope-; I

This function will display all active alarms in all groups on the VDU.
Up to 21 alarms are displayed on each page. An alarm is displayed only once. If the number

of alarms fill more than one page. turn the pages by activating the NEXT PAGE button. The
number of pages are dependent on the system in use.

DataChief2000 - System Description

Doc.no. AU-0190-A 12<l-Oct-94


3.3.5.

11

Alarm History Display


NQRCO!'lTROl.

Alllamou<>.
DOle

Time

I I-lIS. I))

AU.RM HISTORY PAGE I

r.ga__

Ta,g ~npu".
AL'XGEOlRIlE'H

l~,W,ll>

Foo.,

~81I).Q I
181091

07:001:(7 AGOGl

07:001:31 E'<006

ME E'(H TEMP

~8_JO_91

O';l).l:31
07:001:31
07:001:31
0':04:31
07:001;31

cv.'OO9

MEAJELOlLPRE..'iS
ME R!EL 011.. noM}>
ME LUBOn.. TEMP
MEOlJ1UOTF\\'TBoIPHT.SYS
ME COOL SW PR!:SS

07:0<4:31
07:04:31
01:04:.7
O,,(lol:47
0, . 04.-47
07:001,.7
O':()N7
07il4:47
07:001:.7
07c04:H

roMERROR
roM-ERROR
roM-ERROR
CUM.ERROR
C'OM.ERROR
roM-ERROR
roMERROR
roM,ERROR

~8.1O.91

18-10-91
1810,91
28HI-91
18.10.91
18.\0.91
18.111.91
1810-91

2810-<>'
18_10.91

181091
18.10<>1
28-10-"1
28-10-91

R)(IOl
FOO04
WOOl
~'004

0\'010
C\\'Oll

V.h.

en1>

ME NOZlLE COOL PRESS


MElX<lL SWOUTl.ET TEMP
7 COMMUNICATION ERROR SAU 1
to OOMMUl'ilCA nON ERROR SAU 6
5 COMMUNICATION ERROR SAU S
~ CUMM\lNICATlOS ERROR SAU 4
l COMMUNICATION ERROR SAU l
2 CUMMUSICA nON ERROR SAU 2
1 ro~IMUSICAnoNERRORSAl' I
WA OOMM1Jl'/ICATlOS ERRORWATOi.CAll..

E.g. nU Alann
OPE.' M.M
~IJ(I

(1.00
150.0
90.0
QSO

ALM
ALM
A.L\l

0.00
0.00

ALM
M.M
M.M
M.M

960

ALl>!

OPE." M.M
OPEN ALM
OPEN ALM
OPES AUt

OPE."l ALM
nOSE RTS
OPEN ALl>!

OPEN OPE.' ALM

This function displays up to 210 alarms. with time and date. 21 alanns are displayed on
each page. The latest activated alarm is always added to the top of the list. Previous
alanns are deleted. To turn the pages. activate the NEXT PAGE button. The currently
active unacknowledged alarms are marked with an a~terisk (*).

:D:a:ta:C:h:i:ef:2:0:0:0:-:S:y:s:te:m:::De:sc:n:'p:t1:'o:n=============~

Doe.no. AU-O/90A lUOe/94

12

3.4.

Standard Functions

3.4.1.

Date & Time


NORCONTROL
A~_

T""a~
ESOO'
ES'"
ES003
ES""
ESOO'
ESOO6
ES<m
ES'"
ES'"
'sOlO

Tag ok:l<bpUO~

Fu,:

HIGHi1...0WVOLTAGE

XA
XA
XA
XA
XA

ESllll
SOIl
Sllll
.S014

OiARGE FAn.. START BAT.AlJX I


otARGE FAIL START 8A TAL":
\\l."mlNG U SHAFT GE..... PS
""lSl)[l';G U SHAfTOE..... PS

SOIS
ESlll6
ESOl7
ES018

\\1l'D~G U

HIGH/lOW FRQliE."CY

GROU1'o'D FAILURE 1>60V SET


GROtlND FAl1.LIRE

no.. . :-on

GROL:SD FAl1.URE ::ll.... SET

GROUND FAn-URE :20V !'iE1 E),.!ERG.!'OD.

NON e.sS. l.OAD DlSroSNECITRD


FAULT ON E.'tERG.AGGR.
BAT. QiAROEll. EMERG. GEl' FAIL

XA
XA
XA
XA
XA
XA

OiAROE FAlL. 240V E.\tERG.BA T

TWI
TWI
TWI
TWI
TWI
TWI
TWI
TWI
1WJ

SHAF'TOE..... PS
Vr'L"lo'Dll'G U SHAFT Ge- STD
v,'U'ol>!NG U SHAFT GEN ST8

ESOl9

\1,Th-pe-;O U SHAFT GES STB


\\niDII"D U SHAFT GEl', PS

ES'"
ES'"

VolNDING U SHAFTGEN PS
WThODI:'G U SHAFT GEN PS

Eater _

1l.oll.9J

GROL'POISPU,Y AlARM GkOLt' 18 PAGE I OF I

Vuw

12:}(),Jb

Uili'"

"-"''''
"-"''''
"-"''''
"-"''''
nosED

a.OSED

,,-"'ID
a.",,,,

OPE....
OPE.....
OPEN
OPEl'
OPflI;
OPE.'i
OPES

,,
,,

a.OSED

DEtJ,C

OPE.....
UO.OO
140.00
]40.00

66.00 DEG.C
6~_OO

OPE....

OPEN

,,-"'ID
6~.OO

OPE.....
OPE,....

CLOSED

OEGe

140.00

,,

6.l! 00 OEOe
70.00 DEG,C
69.00 OEG C
64.00 OEG,C
UOODEG,C

,,
,,
,,
,

,
,,,
,,
,

l.<I,..!irn- tut;bli

611&_ nIt Alarm

140.00

140.00
1(0,00
1(0.00
1(0.00

(
(

,
,,
J
J

J
J
J
J

,
J
J
J

timt "'. Il\.I!l":

Eater ........ dly of IW mou}; "dd",


Eatt........ moatll "mm"'
Eatcr ........ yn. "n"'

This function will change the time and date.

3.4.2.

System Information Display


1I{IP)
I:.)(}.U

a.;pirrl........
N_e Mt.> ANNE SIF
HaU
1nl106(

YOld If\'NI)AI HEAVY INDUSllUES co


0..... ICNUD I. LARSEN

.......

.... _.

OBU4i~"'l'
~r",ltSl'"

lAoir"_...-.m.

Enc,_~

M;ao,":

"""""wlo~

K..yo.... <A

"I _ y
T. . lol
Api 101
tnltf:ol..,
C_
IOI

Nd~.~

~i".

_iuoo""........
10:)=
So.........
I
.50,",,_...
If' .. h..

READY
ll.,t.Ily

to....1<...,....-. .'Ila<o"'E

T. __

.....-

~.".Iop

e-pIcoo 101

NO
NO
...0

R
ll,~

6OJ5()

So,"" _. 01
P1ojsw ...
P1oj.Sw.v .
P10j ... t>._. MCUPI

sor-"'E
NONE
Sor-"'E
NOI'o"'E

l,.IJ'Rq'Of1 SO"-'E
~"""""'1olo

Pri
"I..
lAc

f'oioMr

;...
up

Fc><.'-:l~

~''''r_

"",.I_f_

L-iro<'ro.-'>

I:

6'

YES
6

:D:Q:/Q:C:h:,:ef:2:0:0:0:.:s:y:s:/e: : m:=D:e:se:n:p:/I:o:n=============~

Doc.no. AUOI90A IU.oct94

13

3.4.2.1.
Functions
DBU display:
This function enables the display"' of the values of all channels in a DB U. DBU is a
common name for SAU. GCU. SAX etc.
Info field enable:
This is an infonnation for Norcontrol use only.
Eng. unit change:
This function enables the change of counts for low/high value
and Eng.value lowlhigh.
See section TAG DETAILS.
Reset counters:
Activating this function enables reset of selected coumers.(hour counters for pumps etc.)

3.4.2.2.
Net Communication
An asterisk (*) will flash to indicate that the communication is active (Only for system
with internal communication between MCUs).
3.4.2.3.
Limited Access Override
Some ships also have a DC 2000 system installed in the cargo control room and on the
bridge. This means that all engine functions are inaccessable from the bridge and cargo
control room. and cargo functions are inaccessable from engine control room. It is
possible to ovenide this limitation with a pa~sword. The Captain and Chief Engineer will
have access to the password.
OCP Configuration
3.4.2.4.
This option enables automatic dimming of the light on the OCP button lamps. This
nonnally done on the bridge.
3.4.2.5.
Station Information
These infonnations are for Norcontrol use only.

DataChief2000 System Description

i~

Doe.no. AU-0190-A 1240et-94

14

3.4.2.6.
Activate Logs
Printouts are activated from this menu.
Complete log:
COMPLETE LOO

T..,....

-If_.fd 111'1"''''' 11.IJ::j<,

10'_"''''

F.-

GEAA5EJ{IJOIl.e-1.EfntESS
GEAR LO Mlle.t lOW PIlESS
GEA..R QUTC Oll.lO""' ptas
GEAALO Fn:m. Olf. Ptas
GEAJ. TlikUSTBEAAL>,;GTD.41'
GEAR LO HlOH lDoO".
nu... n;llE C'r.'o'Dl BEAI; TEMP.
STD.o,;n.llEGRA.V.LUBOIL '"'
MECOS11l.0L AD. E.'P co"'.....
BILOE E. /looM.o.rr HIGH

PloJ.
PIAl.
PIAL
OP-.Ii
1lAH
T1AH
1lAJf
LAL

BILGE E. 1I.00lol.o.rr TOO HIGH

ME tUB Oll. SYST'fJ>l 11>::C


DIRTY u:n all. n UP
BOIl.D. CASCADE Tt;;
H
TK

VoI,...

rI.",

EAf; _,
~u

AJ,u ...

1.10.
1.:10.
I."},

I
I
)
OPE:'> J

or..
OM

8""
BAA

nu"
OM

DEGe
OEGe

.""''''1
)
. ..0(.0} )

0,o"

OEG C

,6HOl )

01'D' I

P,o,L

OPEJ" I

LAJl

. orESl

LAJl
tAL
LAL
tAL _ _.-".
X

,OPEN)

.orEN)
.01'0;)

This function will print the values in alphabetic orders according to the tag no. for all the
units. See also Section 3.5.6.
Alarm summary:
This function will print all the tags which have an active alarm. See Section 3.5.6.
Level correction:
This function will print the Level Correction Log. See Section 7. Special Functions.
Tank log:
This function will print the Tank Log. See Section 7. Special Functions.
API log:
This function will print the API Log. See Section 7. Special Functions.
Ullage log:
This function will print the Ullage Log. See Section 7. Special Functions.
Counter log:
This function will print a Counter log. See Section 7. Special Functions.
Round Trip Report:
This function will print the Rond Trip Report. See Section 7. Special Functions.

:D:a:t:a:C:h:ie:i:2:0:0:0:-:s:y:s:te:m::D:e:s:en:'p::ti:on==============~

Doc.no. AU-0190-A I 24-0ct-94

15

3.4.2.7.
Printer Responsible
Alarm station:
Station (MCU) responsible for printing alarms.

Log station:'
Station (MCU) responsible for printing logs.

3.4.2.8.

Printer Set Up

Provides information about the printer. especially form feed length. which
information when ordering printer papaer

DataChie!2000 - System Description

IS

useful

16

3.4.3.

Doc.no. AU-0190-A 124-0et-94

Selected Points Configuration


sa POI1'tfS

l()j I CO!'o'F

COG ,

...

, ,et""',
"

,
,
,

""
.""
""
""
'""

GROl:P J PAGE I OF 1
<';[,,11. LO I:"oLllC"" lU\''- "'U:.ss
G.d. unlLTn DIF.PRESS
GE"R ntRt:"" BEAlU"C

,,8":
G8H.l
CIlH'
GBH.
GB...

teMP.

GEAR LO tIIGH TF.MP.


GEAR B. Lil .... ART ST.,fl\ P'L'MP

Sd..loi_t.:

D"'f'l~'_

&... 1011'"""'" ...... a1'W..... "'I:

O'orl.l""1"'.....,

<tinc .......,,0/

To inspect tags from different groups simultaneously. use "Selected Points


Configuration". Configure a text display with items from different groups. A maximum of
5 different displays(logs) with 20 measuring points each may be configured. This display
is called a log.

3.4.4.

Selected Points Display


NOROO1..nWL

....o....no.

11Q8'H
11:.\0:16

SE!- IQe-TS DISPLAY I

Toau,no

T., .""cpU...

F..~

O!ltlCll

GEAA SDV On. C'oL.ET fJ\SS


GfAJl L.O C'o"DlC" LOW PRESS
GEAR La FD..TER ClF. PRESS
GEAR THRUST BEARING TEMP.

ew.
'w.
De,,"

G800~

O'~

138005

0""
OM"
\.000'
\.000,
\.000,

loon
,_
U'OO.

u_
cooo>
LQOIO
U)'"

,W<
,W<

GEAR LO tUGH TBlP


GEAJl.lI.LO STAin ST-BY PL"MJ' ...."
~,
ME On.!0041ST DETECl"OR
m",
MEWB on.. ClF. PRESS FaT.
ME LL:B on. HIGH TEMl'.
."lEWB OlLsTAATSTBr PL'MP-'-"
<.AJ.
DIRTY LUB alL TK Z3P
<.AJ.
MEWB OlLSYSTF.M TK::C
STER.,,"TlJ1lEGR,AV. WB OlL TK LAL
STERSTIJllE ll'o~1'JI. BEAR, TEMPTtAH
~,
LUB on.. SEJ'AJU. TOR FALl.T
~,
ME PREl.UB.OlL LOWPRf.SS

,W<

"'.J""

,.W
<J\l~

,,,W
18b.on

Elg.

nit

AJ~

'AR
'AR

LOW

DEOC
DE<1C

HIGH

cw>ro

""

Lo'" tim
(
(
(

(
(
(
(

,~

(
(

Droe

CW>,."

(
(

",,,,rn
cw>rn
cw>ro
,~

,
DEGC

<A.

1.'0,
I.SO.
,OPEN
()l}OO

"'lOO

.OPEN
.OPEN
.OPa-'
,7H.oJ

OPEN
OPEN
OPE:'
OPe.'

.!:L\.OO

OPEN
OPEN

H;~

,,,
,
,
,
,,
,,
,,

This function will display the tags con figured in the "Selected Points Con fig. ".

DataChie!2000 - System Description

17

Doc.no. AU"OI90-A 12.4-0ct-94

3.4.5.

Selected Trend Configuration

CO" ,
a;u.arr
I CA[oOl

SEL POI:-'TS TR:-;O I

11.(110)

casF.

1::.10.16

CONTENT

sr.\J.n1"G AIJ. ME I
GROl'1' 1 l'.o.oE l Of I

CHARGE AIR !'ott I


CHARGE AIR TEMP. ME I
lLTEMP. AIR Pl:('T SHAFT

C ...OI'

,
,
""
""
"""
""
"

C"~II

CAOW

GE~.

This function will configure the selected tags for display as curves. A maximum of 5
displays (trends) with up to 4 tags each are available.
Each tag's trend curve and data will have different colours.

3.4.6.

Selected Trend Display


NOR,CONTROL

SEL. POI:>iTS

AI>l<rnall<D

CAOO8

CAOI'
0.011

CAOH

TRE~D

BAR
UIIAR
120DEG,C
SO DEG,C

STARTING AIR ME I

IIOIIll

Il;30:1~

~O

CI1.Il.R.GE,o.tRM:EI
OiARGE AIR T'fMl'. ME 1
H,n:MP _AIR DUCT SHAFT GEN

....

~"

DEG.C
186.0

lSS,a

155,0

"
'"

Il'.O

1:',0

n,
2(,,1

:00

DJ

...

'"

Dm

9},O

""

""

610

" "
"" "' "" ""
JIO

"

S~"nu}O.

""

fn<,.lImddtspb, ume "hh/l".


EAu tmId dufUy llm<" - .......,

'"

.,"

'"

Suk

JI.O

(....,j

""ill bcdi>:luyed -.toenctU"'1RSELB:TEDTRf)I,DDISPLAY

"''''" SEl.CIl:D nte.iO DlSrLA Y lhmc

"'llJ b< dlIpI.o".,.j ............

".

utnd

This function will display the tags configured in the "Selected Trend Config.'.

:D:a:ta:C::h:ie::if:2:0:0:0:":s:y:st:e:m:D:=e:sc:n:'p:t:iO:n==============~

Doc.no. AU-0190A IUOct-94

18

3.4.7.

Selected Bargraphs Configuration


NORCOi'onOL
_rnutlm

coo,

, W"".

,
,,

I ].OJt_~)

sa. POl:'-TS BARGRAf'HS

l~:JOH

OEllTI

ME lUB OIL PRESS

,....

GROLl' J PAGE l OF I

LOlO~

,
,

ME Ll'B OIL TEMJ>

'Wi

""
""
""
"
"""

Sda:t poup rurkr.

\\'iIJ be dIsp~ '"''''''' ~"'er.,J..ooJd

This function will display the tagvalues as bargraphs. A maximum of 5 displays with up
to 6 tags each are available.

3.4.8.

Selected Bargraphs Display


!'IIORCOI'lTltOL

sa, POMS BARGRAPHS

AuumMi.-.

""'"

,....
,>AM

MELUB Oll. PRESS

LDIC!

ME LUB 011.. TEMP

",,00'

ME. fUEL OIL PRESS


ME Ft.U 011.. IF.MP
GEAR lXlI OlL TEMP
PROPa.t.ER sa.vo OlL PRESS

""~
c.....

C"",

use

"
"
"
JOO

..."

9J,O

"

62,0

20

'"
"

"

II-OS'lJ
l~:JO:lb

, 00

"C

'"
"

,w.
,>AM

.00

I~,O

''''H
,....

~,

"C

'C

.,

'",U

12

"
"
"

"

"'.

.m

I~O

00.

"

"

This function will display the tags configured in "Selected Bargraph Config."

DataChie!2000 System Description

19

Doe.no. AU0190A 12tL-Oet-94 -

3.4.9.

Group Display
J IO~,Q3
12:.\0:11>

-"OROOS"Tll.Ol
aRDl,'}> DlSPU Y A1..ARM GROUP l8 PAGE I OF I
............tio.
f.gum.
ES'"
ES."
ES"}
ES'"
ES'"
ES""
ES'"
ES'"
ES"'"

rig de1I;apUH

HIGH:LOW VOLTAGE
HIGH.1..0'0\' FREQUENCY
GROL1'oTI FAD.URE 660'" SET

"..,

v.~

Eag. nil Alum

XA
XA

x.,

GROW..U FAIl.IJRE JaO\' SET

XA
aROI,'?Io"D FAII..URE ~OV ....ET
XA
GROL1'o'O FAILURE. 110V "eT EMERG. 1'o"Dl"
NOS SS, LOAD DISC'O~SEcrERD
XA

Lo.... hm.

"""0'"

OPEN

OPE."

OPES

(
(

OPE."
OPE....

,,
,

OPE.....

OPES

BAT. a-rAROER EMERtJ. GEN FAll.

XA
.U

l~O'"

XA

XA

(
(

OPE."

FAULT OS EJ.1ERG. "'CUR.


OiARGE FAlL.

ESOII
ESOll

otARGE FAlL START BAT.Al'X [

Sou

OlARGE FAD.... START BA T.AUX 2


\\l...ll[l<;G U SHAFT DE..>,; PS

TlAH 000 DEGC

OPE.."

~Th'Dl:'G

ESOl4

ESOl5

\\1..... 01:"'0 U SHAFT GEN PS


Wr.TIISGU SHAFTGE.... STB
v.Th'DtsG LT SHAFT OE.... STB
V.1....'DISGU SHAFTGE," STB
\l,'t\1)!SG U SHAfT Ge; PS
'WT'o1ll."G U SHAFT GEN PS
\\1....1 l[SG U SHAFT GEo>,; PS

T1AH 0.00 DEG.C

nAH 0.00 DEG.C


n.o.H 000 DEGC
TlAH 0.00 DEG.C
11AH O.OODEG.C
nAH 0,00 DEG.c

(
(
(
(
(

140.00
140,00
140.00
14000

S016
ESOl7
ESOl8
ESOI<;l

ESIr-O
ESlr-l

EMERO,BAT

OPE.'"
OPE.'"

ESOIO

U SHAFT GE.>.; PS

XA

0.00 DEO,C
"""
nAH 0.00 DEG,C

I~O_OO

140,00

140.00
1(0.00

,
,,,
,
,,,
,
,,,
,,,
,,
,
)

This function is for inspecting one or several channels in a group. Values and alarm limits
are displayed.

:D:at=aC=h: ie~f: 2: 0: 0:0:-:s:y:s: te: :m: : : D: e:s: en: p:t: :io:==============~


n

Doc.no. AU-OI90-A /24-0cl-94

20

3.4.10.

Group/Alarm
SORroNTROL
..........tio.

T'8'amt
ESO"
ES<m
ES003
ESOOO
ESOO'
ESOO6
ES007
ESOO'
ESOO'>

ESOJ)
ESO\4

ESOI~

ES02.
ES02'

GROli'P

l~

VAl ...

XA
XA
XA
XA

HIGH,1..0W FREQl:E1'ICY
FAtlXRE 660V SET

GRO~'D

GROUl'iD FAn-t!RE ~OV "'iET


GROL'SD FAlLL'RE !:OY ~"ET EMERG,."o1!(P"
XA
....0... ESS LOAD DISCO~"ECTERn
XA

FAULT ON EMERG, AGUR.


BAT. OVJI.GElI. EMERG.OE.... FAIL
otARGE FAlL. Z40V EMSl.G.BA T
GlARGE FAll.- START BAT.AL'X I

Eag."" Alum

XA
XA

\\1.'"DlSG U SHAFTGE.... PS
\\'t''Dl!''G U SHAFT GEN PS

UOSED
Q.OSED
XA
TlAH 6'00 DEG,C
T1.AH 66.00 DEG,C
TIAH 65.00 DEGC

",Vo1llSG U SHAFT GE,."Il STB

TlAH 6.8.00 DEG.C

V,1.'"DlSQ U SHAFT GEN STB

TIAH
11AH
TIAH
11AH
TIAH

WL"OC<;O U SHAFT OE....


\\'L'"Ol"GU SHAFT GE"
\\Th"O~G U SHAFT GEN
WL'"OlSG U SHAfTGEN

STB
PS
PS
PS

OPEN

OPE."Il

OPE."
OPE,."1

OPE....
OPE... .
OPE."
OPE.'
OPE.'
OPE....
OPEN
I4Cl.OO

,,

140.00

,
,,

70.00 DEG.C
6~OO DB'.C
M.OO DEG,C
6).00 DEG.C
b6,OO DEOC

H.ig~

. 0""

,,,

XA

OiARGEFAn.. START BAT.Ali'X:


\\ThlllSG U SHAFT GE.... PS

l_ ......

,, ,
,,
,,
,
,,

a.Osw
Q.OSED
a.OSED
a.OSW
a.OSED
a.OSW
Q.OSEO
a.OSW
a..OSED
U.OSED

XA

GROlJl',"D FAn.l:RE )SOv SET

IIOS-QJ
11,30:11>

PAGE I OF I

F... ~

TIIf: dta:lip!.io.
H1Gll.O..... VOLTAGE

ESOIO
ESDII
ESOl2

ESOIS
ES016
ESQ]'
ESOl8

GROUPDl5P~Y ALARM

140,00
14(1,00

140,00

,
,,

I~O.OO

140.00

14fl.OO
14fl.OO

This function enables IOggling the display between the Group display (all channels in the
group) and the channels which are currently in alarm status within this group. See next
page.

Group/Alarm
!'IORCOm-ROL
~.~

h .....

ESOO'

"'00'

""'"
"""
"""
"""
ES007

AIAR."I GIIO\..,1' 11 PAGE 1 OF I

T.. d<:a:npK1n
Hlmu.oW VOLTAGE
HIGH.1.0W FUOl.iENCY

"""
XA

XA

GROIJ1'o"D FAllL'RE!J6OV ~'ET


XA
OltOlr.'o"DFAD..URE lI(J\!'.'ET
XA
Oll.OL~"D FAllUltE ;:;:av "'"El"
GROL'ND FAD..URE :~v SET EMSl,a.!'.1Jt'
!'ION W, LOAD DlSCO",,..<1li)
XA

DataChief2000 - System Description

""

VU""

0"",
0"'"
0"';
0"';
0"'"
0"'"
0"'"

Elv:. WId All.rm


(

(
(

(
(
(
(

....

1l00-~J

1~:'0 I~
~

-~

0"';

""'"
OPe<

""'"
OPe<

)
)

""'"

)
)

OPe<

Doe.no. AU-0190-A 124-0et-94 .

3.4.11.

Tag Details Display

3.4.11.1.

Tag Details Analogue_

2l

rAG DETAIlS DISPLAY FOR SAl! OIA~~'EL

'ORCO.""-ROL
Utomlll.Oll

1l-{J8o3

r ;:30;16

TlglWlll"

lOOO3

DBU IIll1fl!>l:f:

D..,cnpU0lI;

"LE LUB. OIL

C1I:ulIIcl num~r'

Funcli"'"

LP

Ad.tptOfnrd;

832,:

Vll ...:

::'13 KGIC'Ml

TYl'" .

Arut"!!.",,

('"una:

"80

00' alum g'<>"P

lnllltnt DBli'
lnlubit dll.~l

Brid~

DBU I.""..J ,nil:

group:

"u(olog'

"

I:

DBU ILn.Lay::

DBU

ILrW~

Low-I"... ilinn hm,t;

Colllltsl,,""

2420

Counts mgll:

3910

Low ili.nn limit;

ERg.unitsl"....,

0.00

High-high ili.nn Iillllt:

ElIg.uniu high:

2.50

High.alarm limit:

IS

Alum-.on deIty:

Alum-olf delly'
Ofhnn:

Fi.lkrfKIOr:

0.t5

This function enables changing of alarm limits. delays etc.

Filter factor should normally be at 0.15, to filter noise.


Offscan is a function used to by-pass alarms.
OCP alarm group is the lamplbutton number on the OCP.
Bridge group is the lamp number on the Bridge unit.
Eng. units high and Eng. units low is the calibrated range of the sensor, and Counts low
and high is the counts value from the DAC in the Acquisition Unit. This value is called a
raw value. In the Acquisition Unit there is a 12-bit DAC (2 12 = 4096) giving a range from
0-4095.
-110%
ocounts
ocounts

-100%
180 counts
180 counts
IFL(1868)

0%
2048 counts
2420 counts

+100%
3910 counts
3910 counts

+110%
4095 counts
4095 counts
IFH

The signal from the sensor will be measured in counts according to the table above. The
second row is for true zero signals (0-10 V - Pt 100 etc.). The third row is for live zero

~D:a:ta:::C:::h:::i~ef:::2:0:::0:::0:-:::s:y:s:::te:::m:D~es:::e::::n:p::::t1:-o:::n=============~

22

Doe. no. AU-0190-A /

U~Oct94.

signals (4-20 mA - 1-5 mA etc.). The founh row shows IFL=\nstrument failure Iow and
IFH instrument failure high. This is an alarm limit when the sensor exceeds the specified
range.

Sensor signal:
Sensor range:
Counts Iow:
Counts high:
Eng.units.low:
Eng.units high:

Examplel:

Example 2:

0-10 V(True Zero)


0-8 bar
2048
3910
0.00
8.00

4-20mA(Live Zero)
0-10 bar
2420
3910
0.00

lO.OO

19b 5Ule
~'a.lue

Pumx\l:r EH
En~ting

vi/lie bigh

..

Paramc~r

..

~
,..,~

,
'"
",

,..,~

EL

P3nmelCf

EL

En~ring

En~tin&

va.lllC'low

~"'
I!:am ~dj.

v.1.lue low

CL

~no

CH
EL

3')10

EH

80

DataChiej 2000 System Description

Puamc~rEH

En~rin&

~a.lue

III
Pot.ll:ll:u.r

PanmeterCH
('''lUllS high

PannrlcrCH

Cmul.lS bl&h

20mA DC

~'a1ue

for gaW ;t.dj.

...... 14. . for


Si~..J4-

'tbsc.a.lc

oo""" ,,.

Si,,:u.lO-IOVDC

CL

Zl).11!

CH

39\0

EL

EH

>0,

bigb

23

Doc.no. AU-0190-A / 24~O{;t94

3.4.11.2.

Tag Details Digital


II08Q}
1~,}(l,16

To,gloJTlO'

AEOOI

Des<:nrt.i~a,

STARn'<GAIR

DBUnmwr:

801.1

MII'CtlO.

'w"

a.OSE
1I.1Ii.... DBli:

labiba d.u....1 .

DBU 1c><.J iab .


Bndgt grnu"

oau a1seLoy I ,

A_log;

Aw"...".....I.l),
Ahrm-otf 4<1.0)":

This function will be a~ for the Tag details analogue. excluding the possibility to simulate
the value in offscan mode.

3.4.12.

Clear Screen
SOROOS1'1l.Ol
.... lIl<>m&tio.

This function will clear the screen

DataChiej2000 System Description

II,08,Q

11:.10:16

Doc.no. AU-OI90-A /24-0ct-94.

24

3.5.

Log Functions

3.5.1.

Group Log

WS EAGLE
KALDNES
GROllPLOG

ESOOl
5002
5003

ES"",
ESOO'
ESooo

SORcosnOL At:TOMA nos AIS


HULL

'n-l~-~7

l~:'t1:':S

LP
LP
GROUSD FAILURE t)fflV LP
GROl:SD FAILURE 380V LP
GROL'SD FAILL'RE ::!Ov LP
SOS ESS, LOAD DISCOS. LP
HIGH/LOW VOLTAGE

H1GH/LOW FREQUESCY

5007
5008

FACL T OS E.\IERG. A(".eR.LP

ESOO<J

otARG. FAll ~ov


LP
OVr.RG.FAIL BAT.AUX I LP
OlARG.FAlL BAT.AUX ~,

ESOIO
ESOII

BAT. GlARG. EM. GE.";.

oc:ooo

so: 10

LP

I'.-\GE 1

OPES
OPE....

OPE....
OPE....
OPE....

OPES
OPES
OPES

aPES
OPE....
OPES

OPE.'"

OPES
OPES
OPES

OPES

OPEr-:

OPE......
OPES

OPES
OPES

OPES

~--'---...

This function will print a selected group

3.5.2.

Selected Points Log

M:SEAGLE
KALOSES
SELECTED POllIoTS LOG 1\0 I

93-1227 12:26.58

PAGE I

Eng,unit

T~gnamc

Tag okscnpuon

"'''

V~UC

MOO'

STARTI;-';GAlR
CHARGE AIR

LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP

24 5 KGiCM2
OPE....

AEOO:
RJOO'
RJOO,
LOOO,
LOOOI

MEoo,
MEOO'

MEoo,
ME""
MEoo,

EO. PRESS
Fa. TEMP
La, PRESS
La. TEMP
Sf ARTISG AIR
LUBRlCATION
LUBRlCATION
LUBRICATION
LUBRICATION

en.!
en2
en,)
en.

Dc:!OOO

r-oORCOSTROL AL1'OMATIO:-; A. S
HULLSO.310

f,

AJ=

Lo...

um.

Higlll.im.

18 00.
OPE."'i
OPE....
OPEN
0PE."l

OPE....

OPE.'
OPE....
OPE....
OPE."I
OPEN
OPE."l
aPES
OPE.'Ii

OPEN
OPE....
OPE."1
OP'o,;
OP,o,;
OPES

./
~

,
,,
,

I
I

I
I
I

--..........

This function will print the infonnation configured in selected points configuration,

:D:a:ta:C:h:i:ef:2:o:0:0:-:s:y:s:te:m:=D:e:sc:n:'p:/I:'o:n=============~

25

Doc.no. AU-0190A/ 24-0ct-94

3.5.3.

Autolog

3.5.3.1.

Autolog Display
II_08.Q3

!"ORro:-'lROl

AUTOLOO DISPlAY

AUlomouOI

1~,30:16

]: 00,00

s:

0<1,00

/0'

11.15

7;

n.lO

18.00

10: 20.[5
OFF

Prial ""rn.ud

This function will print all tags configured as Auto log. Tag Details function show
whether a tag is configured for inclusion in the autolog printout. It will print the tags
according to a user configurable time table.

3.5.3.2.

Autolog Printout
M,rSEAGLE

NORCONTROL ALTOMATION AiS


HULL NO: 10
93-12-2712:I/d8

KALDNES
AUTO LOG

T~gnmlc

Tag dc::lCIlpUOn

Funo;

MOO'

STARn:-;o AIR
CKARGEAJR

LP
LP

AEOQ2

V;\j...

Enpmll

AJ.l111I

2.UKotC"'e

PAGE 1

LOIIi Lirn

HIgh lim.

1800.
OPEN
OPE)<,"

I
I

,,

FOOO'
FOOO'

FO, PRESS

LP

FO, TEMP

LP

OPEN
OPE....
OPEN

LOOOI
LOOOI

LQ PRESS
LO.TEMP

LP
LP

OPE....

ope:-;

OPEN

OPE....

I
I

STARTlSO AIR

LP
LP
LP
LP

aPES

OPE.'"

OPE.'"

OPEN

OPE.....
OPE....

OPE:..
OPE....

...LP

OPEN

OPEN

MEOO'
MEOO2
MEOO3
ME"'"
MEOO'

en.. 1 LUBRICATION
en.,2 Ll.iBRrCATION
en,) LlfBRICA
CYL4 LlJBRJCATION

nos

./

DataChie!2000 - System Description

OPEN

,
I

Doe.no. AU-OI90-A / U,Oct-94..

26

3.5.4.

Inhibit Points Log


MS EAGLE
KALD~es

INHIBIT POI!'oTS LOO

NORCO:-.TROL ALTO~tAT10:-" AS
HL1.l :>;0, 10
9)-12~7 12:1f>:58

T~8nUll(

T~

IN OIl I

BLOCK OF Al..AR.\1 ME

IS 002

F O. PRESS

IS 01)3

Fun,;

,xscnption

FO, TE.\.1P

IS()l).,l

La,PRESS

I" 005
11'006
IN 007

LO. TEMP
CVU LUBRICATION
CYl.2 LUBRJCATIOS

IS 008
IS 00':1

CYL

en.) UJBR1CA nos


~

LL.1JRlCA nON

"'~IX

Enjl:.lIn'l

Al=

XA
XA
XA
XA
XA
XA
XA
XA

CLOSEn
ope:",

opE='

OPES

'"

OPE."

OPE."

PCOOO
PAGE I

Lo",'L'm.

H1~lIlim

OPES
OPES

OPE'"

OPES
OPES
OPE."
OPE.","

OPES

OPES
OPE.",
OPEN

OPE:-I

This function will print all inhibit points (alarm blocking signals).

3.5.5.

Complete Log

T...""001

AEOO2
FOOl'
FOOl)

LOOOI
LOOO)
MEOOl
MEOO2
MEOOJ
MEOOS

MEOOS

""'000

NORCOSTROl AUTOMATION A/S

MIS EAGLE
KALDNES
CO~1PLETE

HUll. so: 10
931227 12:16:45

LOG

T.,<baipuon
STARTISG AIR
otARGEAIR

F.C. PRESS
f.C. TEMP
LO. PRESS

La.THtP
STARTING AlR
CYL.I
C'iL.2
CYL.J
CYLA

LUBRICAnos
LUBRICAnON
LUBRICAno!"
LVBRICAnos

"""
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP

J::

V~lIC'

PAGE 1

En&-llDil

""""

OPES

OPEN

OPEN

OPEN

OPEN

OPEN

OPE!"
OPE!"

OPEN

OPEN

OPEN

aPEs

OPES
aPEs
OPEN
OPES
OPES

OPE!'\.'
OPEN
OPES
OPES

Lo-oo.' Lim. Higb lim.

OPE."l

)
)

,,
,
,,
)

............

The Complete Log will print all measuringpoints in the system.

:D:a:t:aC:::h:ie:1: : 2: : o:0:0:.:sy: s:/e:m: D: : e:sc:n:p:t:iO:n==============~

Doc.no. AU-0190-A 124-.0ct-94

3.5.6.

27

Alarm Summary Log


WS EAGLE
KALDSES
AlARM SUMMARY LOG

SORCO:>oTROLAUTmtATIOl'o' AIS
HULL
10
93-1;!';~7 :!1:15:17

so:

FllDC Value

AEOOI

Eng.wUI AWm

Lm'i LUll. High li:n.

FOOOI

FOOOI

F.D. TEMP

LP

OPES

OPEN

I
I

LOOOI

L.O. PRESS

LP

OPEs

OPEs

LOOOI

LO. TEMP

LP

OPES
OPEf'.:
OPE,'"

PAGE I

STARTlSG AIR
G1ARGE AIR
F.D. PRESS

AEOO~

LP
LP
LP

OC;!OOO

OPEN

OPEr-;
OPEN

OPES

OPES

MEOOl

STARTISGAIR

LP

OPES

OPEN

MEOO;!

(')'L.1 LUBRICATION

LP

OPES

LP
LP

OPES
OPEN

OPES
OPEN

."1E~

CYL.;! ll!BRJCA nos


CYL.J lUBR!C'ATIOf'.:

MEOOJ

OPEN

.'.1005

CYL.-lo LUBRIC'ATIOS

OPE;.;

OPEN

...L.p

L_-------'/,;-~=:-

Alarm Summary Log prints all currently active alarms.

DataChie!2000 - System Description

"---

28

Doe.no. AU-OJ90-A I24,Oet-94.. -

4.

EXTENDED ALARM AND

4. I.

In trod uction

W ACTH CALLING SYSTEM

The Extended A1arrn and. Watch Call System comprise machinery alarm indicators and
communication between the ECR. engineers quarrers and the bridge. The number of
functions are ship dependent.
The following alarms are provided for both the Bridge Panel (WBU) and the Engineers
Quarters Panel (WCU). The alarm group indicators are optional and have the same
function for both Bridge- and Engineer Quarters Panels.

CRITICAL ALARM
INDICATORS:

NON-CRITICAL
ALARM INDICATORS:

4.2.

These indicators are texted to request navigators to perform


a correct action such as slow-down or shut-down of the
propulsion engines.

These indicators are normally texted. as for general


a1arm(s). These alarms do not affect the normal operation of
the ship. and no action from the Bridge will affect them.

On the Bridge

The Bridge facilities are provided for indicating alarms. and for indicating and accepting
transfer of machine watch responsibility to and from the bridge. When the ECR is
unattended. one or more engineers must be on-duty call. The general alarm signal will call
them to the ECR if an alarm condition arises. When an alarm is acknowledged in the
ECR, indications are also given on the Bridge Panel.
The bridge personnel can call the on-duty engineer from their quarters at any time, for
consultations etc. Indicator for acknowledgement of such calls is provided.

:D:a:ta:C:h:':'ef: 20:O:O: -s:y:s:te:m=D:e:se:n:'p:t:iO:n::============~

29

Doe.no. AU-0190-A /24-0et-94

4.2.1.
Watch Bridge Unit Panel
A standard bridge alarm and watehcall panel is shown beluw, The panel layout and some
of the functions are ship dependent.
The main functions of-the-panel are: .
Alarm group indicators.
Call all engineers without regards to watch responsibility,
Indicating and accepting the transfer of machine watch responsibility to/from the
bridge.
Call on-duty engineers from their quarrers at any time.
Buzzer and test function.
Each indicator and push bunon is explained on the following pages.

WED

MilD

Watch Bridge UnIt

U.,

U,

~DU

_."""""""
.....
""""

"" "'" "" "" '"""""


-, .,.. ~""
"""
"" "'" "'" "" .....
~

a~u

""

....

.... I=-I

,""""
0

[I]~~OOOO
:rr

C:rr

:rr

wa;.,

:ri

00000
00000
~G0~@]
0

Fig. 2 Watch Bridge Unit (WBU)

:D:a:t:a:C:h:ie:if:2:0:0:0:-:s:y:s:te::m:::D:e:s:cn:':Pt:io:n==============~

30

Doe.no. AU-0/90-A 12.J,Oel-94 -.,_.. ' "

Indicators:

COMMON
MACHINERY ALARM;

Lit at every new alarm in the Engine Control Room


(ECR) without regard to the bridge group. This button
indicates that the ECR buzzer is active
When the alarm is ack. in the ECR. the indicator is turned
off.

ALARM GROUPS
BRIDGE GROUP(S)
(indicators 1-15);

The bridge group alarm indicators are divided into two


groups:
I. Indicators for Critical alarms.
2. Indicators for Non-critical alarms.

SYST. FAIL:

Lit if a system failure occurs.

REPEAT COMMON
MACHINERY ALARM:

Flashes if SOUND OFF is not pressed within 3 minutes


of alarm ack. in the cabin on-duty.

Illuminated
push buttons:
BRIDGE WATCH:

illuminated to indicate that the ECR is unattended.

CONTROL ROOM
WATCH:

llluminated to indicate that the ECR is attended.

CHIEF. I.ST. - 4.TH.


ENGINEER ON DUTY:

llluminated to indicate watch responsibility.

SOUND OFF:

Deactivate the buzzer.

TEST:

Test for panel buzzer and light indicators.

CALL DUTY
ENGINEER:

When pressed. the button starts flashing.

CABIN
ACKNOWLEDGE:

llluminated when an alarm is ack. in the cabin on-duty.

FAIL SAFE:

llluminated if internal failure occur.

3/

Doc.no. AUO/90-A / UOct94

4.3.

In the Engineers' Quarters

If an engineer has been assigned to on-duty call (from the ECR). the alarm signal will
cause the buzzer to sound and the indicator to light up. both in the cabin and in the general
quarters. The Engineer will then normally go to the ECR to fmd the cause cf the alarm. If
the engineer does not acknowledge the alarm in the ECR within 3 minutes. the alarm
signal will be repeated in the engineers quarters and on the bridge, until the call is
acknowledged.

4.3.1.

Watch Calling Unit Panel

A standard Engineers Quarter alarm and watehcall panel is shown below. The functions
are ship dependent.
The main functions of the panel are:
Alarm group indicators.
Call from bridge and engine.
Indicating on-duty responsibility.
Buzzer and test function.

71

[7

0000 0 OO~
0000 0 ~~
0000 0 000

ooo
WeD
DUTY

IIJiOj

SAfE

V.

IL\RW

IHla:

DUTY

ENQHE

11l(J/

OO~

..

DUTY

Watch Coiling UnIt

~@)@;)

Cl<
IlUTY

ERROR

oYTOMoTION

OB~

/1

Fig. 3 Watch Calling Unit (WCU)

DataChiej2000 System Description

32

Doc.no. AU-OI90A 12g.,Oct-94 ,.. , ...

Indicators:
ALARM GROUPS
BRIDGE GROUP
(indicators 1-15):

Indicates alarms

SYSTEM FAILURE:

Illuminated if a system failure occurs.

CALL FROM BRIDGE:

Illuminated when CALL ALL ENGINEERS at the


bridge is pressed.

CALL FROM ENGINE:

Illuminated when CALL ALL ENGINEERS at the ECR


is pressed.

COMM. ERROR:

Illuminated when

ON DUTY:

Illuminated to indicate if this WCU is on duty.

CHIEF.
IST.-4TH.
ENGINEER ON DUTY:

illuminated to indicate watch responsibility.

COMMON ALARM:

illuminated at every new alarm in the Engine Control


Room (ECR) without regard to bridge group. This button
indicates that the ECR buzzer is active
The indicator is turned off when SOUND OFF is pressed
in the ECR.

FAIL SAFE:

illuminated if an error
occurs.

FIRE ALARM:

illuminated if an fire alarm occurs (optional).

communication error occurs.

ID

the Watch-calling system

Illuminated
push buttons:
SOUND OFF:

Press the button to ACK. an alarm.

TEST:

Test for panel buzzer and light indicators.

:D:Q:IQ:C:h:I:'ef::20:o:0:-:S:y:s:le:m=:=De:sc:n:p:'I:'O:n=============~

Doc.no. A U0/90A I U.Oct94

4.4.

33

In the Engine Control Room

In the Engine Control Room an operator control panel is provided for selection of
engineers for watch call duty. A function for calling all engineers. whether on duty or not.
to the ECR in the case of an emergency is also available.
Engine Watch responsibility can be changed from the ECR to the Bridge. and vice versa.

4.4.1.
Operator Control Panel
Push buttons for Watch Call functions:

1:: 11 ~~~ I oti~TY I ~ 1


1ST.

2ND.

ENC.

ENC.

DUlY

ON DUlY

D.

~1H.
ENC.

~
DUlY

ON DUlY

ENG.

Fig. 4 Watch-calling at the DCP in Engine Control Room

DataChiej 2000 - System Description

34

Doe. no. AU-0190-A I 24cOct-94 . - ' .

Illuminated push buttons:


BRIDGE WATCH:

Initiate Bridge Watch. (Engine room is unattended).

ENGINE WATCH:

When the ENGINE' WATCH is on. the watch


responsibility is in the engine room. (Default at system
statt).

CHIEFENG.
ON DUTY:

When this button is illuminated. the Chief eng. is in


charge of the watch. when the engine room is unattended.
The ON DUTY indicators in the cabin of the chief eng.
and in the engineers dayrooms are also on.

CALL ALL
ENGINEERS:

When pressed. the button starts flashing, and the


indicators and horn on all watehcall panels in the
engineers quatters are activated.
To deactivate these functions, press the button.

\. ST ENG.
ON DUTY:

When this button is illuminated. the I.sr.eng. on duty is in


charge of the watch, when the engine room is unattended.
The ON DUTY indicator in the cabin of the \.st eng. and
in the engineers dayrooms are also on.

~.ND.ENG.

When the button is illuminated. the 2.nd. on duty is in


charge of the watch. when the engine room is unattended.
The ON DUTY indicator in the cabin of the 2.nd.and in
the engineers dayrooms are also on.

ON DUTY:

3.RD.ENG
ON DUTY:.

When this button is illuminated, the 3.rd. on duty is in


charge of the watch. when the engine room is unattended.
The ON DUTY indicator in the cabin of the 3.rd.and in
the engineers dayrooms are on.

4.TH.ENG
ON DUTY:

When this button is illuminated. the 4.th. on duty is in


charge of the watch. when the engine room is unattended.
The ON DUTY indicator in the cabin of the 4.th.and in
the engineers dayrooms are also on.

CALL DUTY
ENGINEER:

If no 4th. eng. is configured, this button will be used to


call duty eng.

DataChiej2000 - System Description

Doe.no. A U-0190A / J,40et.94

5.

MIMICS

5.1.

Introduction

35

The DC 2000 Monitoring and Control system is a' system including remote process
operation.
Dynamic data from the process is collected via distributed process stations and fed into
the signal processing database.
The dynamic data is presented on mimic diagrams on the operator station on request. Via
the mimic diagrams the opereator can alldress remote operated units such a~ pumps,
valves. fans, doors etc. and give commands for opening / closing. start / stop and
percentage opening of valves.
The command is transmitted to the local process station to which the unit is interfaced.
The process station will then execute the command.
The following process stations are available:

5.2.

PCU. Programmable Control Unit


GCU. Generator Control Unit
PMU. Power Management Unit
Standard Mimic Diagrams

The database holds several standard pictures for display of common information from the
engine and the ancillary equipment provided that the functions are included in the
delivery. The standard pictures are:
I.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Exhaust gas temperatures and average temperature bar graph


Stand-by pumps status summary
Controllers and valves status summary
Power management
Main switchboard and generators

Examples of pictures are shown on the next page..

DataChiej 2000 System Desrription

Doc.no. AU-0190-A IUdJct-94

36

"

'.

,~

t:

rr

i
-~

t.
,

t
t-.

:.1

- .. ,
,.....,

(- "I' ,

-.-.- _._._.- ----.-.- _.~~~:

'

- - --()
G =.:._----- ------._-._- ._- --._- ---.~

.IID
.1ID _.-411
__
-~",.--

-1::_-'-

5.3.

I'

...

Customized Mimic Diagrams

In addition to the standard pictures. customized mimic diagrams will be designed for each
project according to the ship design. These pictures show the status of the equipment
(open/closed. running/stopped. '70 filling etc.) and are interactive. thus allowing operation
of the equipment.

.. -

r.tEUlIOn.S\,Slt.'tt

m..

..Jr=(1'

L-

DataChief2000 - System Description

Doe. no. AU-0190A / U-Oct94

5.4.

37

Remote Operation of Controlled Units

The operator calls the mimic diagram by pressing one of the mimic push buttons. (If more
than one mimic diagram is assigned to the mimic push button. the other diagrams may be
selected by pressing "Next Page" or "Previous Page".)
The cursor (marker) must be positioned on the selected unit to be operated. The unit is
adressed by pressing the "READ" push button. and the adressing is acknowledged when
the unit symbol starts to flash. Actual state and/or parameters for the unit is displayed in
the lower left corner.
To open / start / activate press the push button marked "I". The command is transferred to
the PCU. GCU or PMU. which is interfaced to the unit. The unit will then execute the
command. The change of state is indicated when the symbol on the mimic change colour.
The same procedure for close / stop / deactivate.
To change a setpoint for a controller / valve the cursor (marker) must be positioned on the
selected unit and the "READ" push button pressed. The menu in the lower left corner will
prompt the operator for actual parameters. The parameters are input to the system by
numeric input.

DataChief 2000 System Description

Doc.no. AU-O/90-A /24-0ct-94

38

5.5.

Standard Symbols for Mimics

The following symbols are a NORCONTROL AUTOMATION "standard" to represent a


graphic image of process-items.
Our choices of symbols are made to ensure good readability / easy recognition of essential
infonnation in the pictures.
The

main ideas of the symbol-design L~:


Simple design.
Easy to identify and distinguish from other symbols.
Derived from documentation standards (ISO/lEC/NS).

5.5.1

Analogue valves

Symbol class:
Symbol

~
~

VALVES
(Analogue)
Type
Remote
control valve
Remote control
three-way valve

Status:
Open:
Closed:
Intennediate:
Failure:
"Closed"
"Open"

"lntennediate
"

Colour:
Media colour
Grey
Yellow
Red

y
y
. ~

.A

"tr~

:D:a:t:aC=hl~"eJ~2:0:0:0:-:s~y:s:te:m=D:e:::sc:n~p:t:io:n=============~

39

Doc.no. AU-0190-A IU-Oct-94

On I Off valves

5.5.2

Symbol class:
Symbol

(On/Off)
Type

Remote control
valve

[5l(J

Local / manual
operation valve

VALVES

Remote control
non - return
valve
Local control
non - return
valve
Safety-valve

Status:
Open:
Closed:
Intermediate:
Failure:

Colour:
Media colour
Grey
Yellow
Red
Media colour

Open:
Closed:
Intermediate:
Failure:

Media colour
Grey
Yellow
Red
Media colour

Static:
---else--------Open:
Closed:
Intermediate:
Failure:

Media colour
----------------------Media colour
Grey
Yellow
Red

Reduction valve

I><J

Media colour
"Closed"

Remote control
change over
valve

"Open"
"Intermediarc"

Local / Manual
change over
valve
Local control
valve with feedback

DataChief 2000 - System Description

:;
Media colour

"Clnsed"

--

"Open"
"Intennediale"

~~

:;

Doc.no. AU0/90A / 24~Oct94

40

5.5.3

Breakers / Switches

Symbol class:
SYmbol

G-f)

/0

flQ
5.5.4

BREAKERS/
SWITCHES
Tvpe

Status:
Connected:

Breaker
Disconn.:

Colour:
Color of connected
line
Grey
Colour of connected
line

Switch

Pumps / Fans / Compressors

Symbol class:
Symbol

8
HIGH/LOW

R
@

0
Cd

PUMPS &
FANS
Tvpe
Conrrollable
One speed or
variable

Status:

Colour:

Stopped&locaJ
Stopped&sundby
Slopped

White

Conrrollable
Two or more
fixed speeds

SlOpped

Conrrollable
bi-directionaJ .

Ruming

G",,,,
Red Circle
\\1tite
Yellow
Gray
Green

Failure/alarm

Red Circle

SlOpped&locaJ
Slopped
Running

White
Gray
G=n

Failure/a1ann

Red Circle

Running

Failure/alarm
Stopped&local
Stopped&sundby

One speed or
variable
No feedback
Fan or
compressor
No feedback
Conrrollable
fan or
compressor

Yellow

Gray

Media colour

Media colour

Slopped&local
Slopped
RUIUling

Vvbile
Gray
ureen

Failure/alarm

Red Circle

DataChie!2000 System Description


~-

Doc.no. AUOI90A I U-Oct-94

5.5.5.

Miscellaneous symbols

Symbol class:

Miscellaneous
Tvpe

Svmbol

Status:

Colour:

>

Direction arrow

Media colour

<

Direction arrow

Media colour

Filter

Media colour

ill

Cooler / Heater

Media colour

Cooler / Heater

Media colour

Heat exchanger

Media colour

Heat exchanger

Media colour

~
@

Controller
symbol

Off:
Semi-Auto:
Auto:

grey
white
green

:0
-&J-

Controller

Circle:

See below

x indicates Type:
T-temp
L-level etc.

Valve

See ANALOGUE
valves

I
I

I
1

DataChiej2000 - System Description

41

Doe.no. AUOI90A 1240et94

42

Continued from previous page:


Symbol cla~s:
Symbol

r0
I
I

Tvre

Status:

Colour:

Controller
(with by-pass)

Circle:

See below

Valve

See ANALOGUE
valves

I
I

1~~

-7'

Miscellaneous

Ejector

Media color

Over-board

Media color

Sea chest

Sea color

DataChief2000. System Description

Doc.no. AUO/90-A I UOct94

6.

PROCESS CONTROL

6.1.

Introduction

43

All functions for data acquisition. signal.conditioning. signal scaling and process control
are performed in distributed unit~ located close to the process. This solution ensures that
local operation is maintained on every unit even if the remote system is not operating. The
local distributed functions are described in separate manuals and comprise the following
functions:

Stand By Pumps
Valve Control
PID Control
Compressor Control
Purifier Control
Boiler Control
Power Managment System

DataChie!2000. System Desrription

Doe.no. AU0190A /

2A~Oet94

44

6.2

..---

Stand By Pumps

DataChief pump control is programmed)n the peu. Remote control is possible from the
Remote Operator Stations which is located in engine control room.
The pumps can be operated from the remote operator station in two ways:
From the stand by pump mimic
From a mimic included in the monitoring and control system

"'" "'" ....

IfISl MD IU\

~MDI!EIl.

"'" .mH....

..

~
coo;~~
~~~
~~8r
oo A .... ~
2.
oo A
2
lICCO
A
2OCOOl'l
.... 2
rtlSl MD liIEll.
IRiT
MO
Rl'\.
""" MO 110I"'''' ""
-+

M"''''''''

"'" "'" ....


=;~b
llOOO A
.... 2
IRiT

Mo llDl..

"""av""",
IRSl MD IlDt.

~~

QXlOA

.... 2

I"F6T MO

IlQL

1Il1lDf \lIlt tiE I'U9'S

"'" ""' ....


~~
a""
IRi1 MO IlD'L

51tllli 1UlE LO I'I.M'S

lYE l-tl(l LD I'Ul'I'S


IflSl 1'1II0 IlDI.

~~

l:alO A

-+ 2

IflSl MO IlDl

TIi a:Kl 91 Clllt F\III'S


IRiT MO llEII.

~~

IXIlO A

.... 2

I'ROl IIITIlIlE/!.

"" "'" """

....ra:~
lIST MOllEl'!.

I'RiT MD llEII.

IIllILDl

ro llUfI A.K'S

LP

ro liCDSt

-+

",.nos

.. F'O ea;sT fUf'S

rFIS1 Mllli1En.

"'" "'" ""

~~8or
~~~
2.
ODCIO
11
.... 2NTlllVl
"'"
"'"
""
PI.tPS
oo A

-+

MS!

TIIO U'QJJl

II\Sl MO IU\

~~

0tIllI A

.... 2-

I'ASl MO lVL

I'RIJrI f't[D Nt"5

MST MD lVL

TIIO CXNJ,. CDCS I'UI'S

"'" "'" ""

~~

lllIXlill

.... 2-

"'" "'" ""

" " " aN>.

""" ""'"

"'" "'" ""

~~~
~~~
..... 22-

oo11

II'IS'T MD 'VI.

"""""""""'"

OlD) A

.....

"'" "'" ""


""""-

"" """

Stand-b)' pumps mimic piclure

The following features are provided:

Remote start and stop


Stand by start at low pressure
Restart after blackout
Group start of pumps
Alarms from the stand by pump logic:
Stand By Start Alarm
Auto Start Fail Or Trip
Non Stand By Alarm

:D:a:ta:C::h:ie:1:2:0:0:0:-:s:y:st:e: :m: : : D:e:se: :n:p:t:iO:::n==============~

Doc.no. AUOI90A L24"Oct-94 .

.6.3

45

Valve Control

The Valve Control function is a software module that resides in the Process Control Unit
(PCU). The PCU also contains the necessary signal interface for input of the controlled
variables and feed-back signals and output of the control signals.
The Valve Control System communicates with the Remote Operator Stations of the
DataChief-2000 system and can be activated from these.

\OC'...., """""
OllRU6HT

..,.,
"'"
.m."
""""'"
""""''''
""

.""'".

"""'" """"""
'"..""'"", """"''''
"""""'"
""""''''

0W05T

... "'"

1XlCICOCl-;:::- CIXlCOO

HIll

tit El

E>

Hll0

..-

~ HlOJ

Hl12

,-

"of

HlO7

H'l~~

Ktlll

Hl

""'=(.1 BILGE

..."'"

..-

.
m

...

"~
~.

ll.1O.\1'\

"'"'"

,
i~ ~ ""'"
""'"
""'" '"'"

i"OO

"'1

tI'
HI!

"""""

~~.
~

~~.

l>
~~.

"""" """""
"""''''
""""''''
""""''''
""""''''

'OS

W'" ""

..."'"

"""""
""""''''
"""'"

"""""

""""''''
""""''''

Vah'e Colltrol Display

The controlled valves included in a DataChief-2000 system are presented and controlled
from the Remote Operator Station display. The display can be activated from any of the
Remote Operator Stations connected to the network. including the bridge station.
Standard softwaremodules are provided for operation and control of the following types of
valves:

Single-Acting Valve
Double-Acting Valve
Double-Acting Valve with Position Control

Additional Functions provided are:


Pulsed Output
Analog Input Read
Automatic CLOSE of Valves
Auto OPEN /CLOSE Valve
Low-level Auto CLOSE Valve
Automatic OPEN/CLOSE of Valve

:D:aJ: aC: : :h:ief: :2:o:0:0:-:s:y:s:te:m=D:e:s:cn:'p:t:io:n==============~

46
6.4

Doe.no.

AU-O/90-A

IU-Oe/-94

PID Control

The DataChief-2000 PID Controller System is a software module that resides in the
Process Control Unit (PCU). The PCU contains the necessary signal interface for input of
the controlled variables and feed-back signals and output of the control commands. Each
controller is runed from the PCU front panel that also displays the values and parameters
during commissioning.
The PID Controller System communicates with the Remote Operator Stations of the
DataChief-2000 system and can be adjusted from these.

""""""_.
"'"

m:t I
OOT

TnT 5
1Il1T

""""""_.
"""
""":2
TOO

1IllT

='~=.

~""" ='~=.

lOO 7 ...

TOOt
lJllT

tEXl'5
UlIT

:r

lOT 5

IItlT

lIOlT

1DCT

Itn 7

ltlI'l 7

ID'T

ltJt .......

;,i ~;.:
TEXT 1

~=.

TEXT .
~

;,i ~;,:

TtXf 5
\.lilT

TEXT 1

TOO J ...

lDf:I(llDI """,.

TD1

TEXT
aJmU.llJl/A"E'

I 001"
Z (lI1LCIlJL.

DIXDDXICIO
IlIXIlClItUXI

J lDI\oIAIlCJl -

DIXDDXICIO

~11lT

DIXDDXICIO

Dl:IlXlCUlOIXI

4 -

S-ro;(

( -no.

l-sDI llIl1l I

PlO COll/ml Displl1Y

The PID controllers included in a DataChief-2000 system are presented and operated
from the Remote Operator Station display. A standard picture is designed for this purpose
and it is activated from the Operator Control Panel by a separate push-button. It can be
activated from any of the Remote Operator Stations connected to the network. including
the bridge station. From this picture. the operator can address any of the PID controllers
and adjust the gain. integration time. derivation time. setpoint and mode.

:D:Q:/:Q:C:h:ie:if:2:0:0:0:-:s:y:s:/e:m::D:e:s:en:'p:/:io:n==============~

Doc.no. AU0190A I240c/94


6.5

47

Compressor Control

The DataChief-2000 Compressor Control is a software module that resides in the Process
Control Unit (PCU). The main purpose is to maintain the air receiver pressure at a
constant value. This function includes remote manual and automatic stan and stop of the
compressors, restan after black-out and automatic drain control. The PCU contains the
necessary signal interface for input of the controlled variables and feed-back signals and
output of the control commands.
The Compressor Control system communicates with the Remote OperatfJr Stations of the
DataChief-2000 system.

L-_---'

I", __'11~=r-:.-.-~>---o=~-=,..,
--I
il.UX. ~

RES

..""""
......,
BBBlllIAR

'llOIJlAR

"

...

ENGIHE

'<JlT
",

RE"

CONTROL

'"

COONSUM

Compressor Control Display

In addition to the manual control from the PCU panel, the Compressor Control included in
a DataChief-2000 system are presented and operated from the Remote Operator Station
display. A special picture is designed for this purpose and it is activated from the
Operator Control Panel by a separate push-button. It can be activated from any of the
Remote Operator Stations connected to the network, including the bridge station.

:D:U:/U:C::h:ie:1:2:o:0:0:":s:y:s:/e:m::D:e:sc:n:p:/:iO:n==============~

48

Doc.no. AU-0190-A / 24-0ct94

6.6

Purifier Control

Norcontrol purifier control program is specially wrinen to operate ALFA LAV AL's self
cleaning oil purifiers.and includes operation of the following equipment:

Crude oil booster pump (OPTIONAL)


Crude oil temperature controller
Purifiers
Sealing valves
Discharge valves

The equipment may be controlled from the PCU front panel menu or from a remote host
computer(MCU).via serial communication.
When using a host computer (MCU) system .the whole process is controlled via operator
control panel (OCP) and mimic picture.
Purifier configuration is selected manually by operating different by-pass valves directly.
The PCU program will sense whether purifiers are running in serial or parallel.The mode
of operation is then indicated on the mimic picture by showing the oil path as green lines.
Purifier no.1 will always run as purifier.
Purifier nO.2 may be selected to run as purifier or clarifier.
When connected to host computer (MCU) system.the purifier plant may be observed and
conntrolled from the graphic mimic picture by use of trackerball and operator panel
(OCP).

""""""'"
""""""'"
""""""'"
""""""'"
-I "'"
o-RJTtl 1-SDl1""""""'"
FUTO ,

I - "'IN

2 - 1HrnM.

J lD:llAlllJr1

4 - SEIJlDIIlT

~.

.."'"

t..

I'";;;-'

,,,,,.

.. '"
---1IATIR

'"

LOO.

]~.~ ImF.

...""

t~-----j
IIOTIL Pm

"'--"

'"1:0

~~

~')

.,
>

'"

..

, ...

I'IIX[SSINOl9<llTIN:l
W INTOMl.

!HUTlNii IIflDML
5[lfl15

Iill[j]
~.,
DJ IT! IT! G
."

DataChiej2000 System Description

1=1G I
[J]

[J]

"'" '"

~ ""=B=~
'"

~ "'----'

'"

.. ""..

toR. 2 Pl,RIF Kl

111.1 IUlIF Kl

"''''''

j!:
~SI1liJ9Ul11"6

TilE UTDiWL

1=..- I
CD ITJ ITJ

!ill wo

Doe. no. AU-0/90-A / ~4-0ct-94

49

Boiler Control

6.7

Norcontrol boiler control system is a .standard PlO controller in Process control unit
(PCU) and is adaptable to differemt kind of boilers. The Norcontrol Boiler control system
program is a choise of security. with extensive use of fail checking and with a built in
program for controlled shut down.together with visable alarms.
The boiler system parameters are easily available on the front panel of the PCU. All the
parameters are available from the PCU front panel.
System information such as alarms and analoge values are transfered via the current loop
and displayed on the colour graphic monitor. where the whole process is observed.
The boiler control involves total control of the following equipment:

Fuel oil standby pumps


Burner motor
Fuel pre heater
Nozzles
Ignition unit
Air damper
Steam relase valve

DataChief 2000 System Description

50

6.8

Doe.no. AU-0190A /24,Oe(-94 .


Power Managment System

The power management system performs control of the total power generation and
distribution of the ship. It includes all the automatic functions necessary for safe and
economic operation of the power plant.
The system consists of several Generator Control units (GCU). each performing the
power management functions of the connected generator unit. The electrical generators
can be driven by a diesel engine. by a steam turbine or by the propeller shaft. The GCUs
have different configurations and control strategies depending on the type of drive. The
GCUs are connected to a remote supervisory system. which allows the operator to initiate
the same monitoring and control functions that can be performed locally. Communication
between the supervisory system and each GCU is carried out on redundant serial lines.
Interactive colour graphics mimic diagrams and a dedicated functional keyboard with
roller ball in the remote operator station are used for remote monitoring and control.
The main Generator Control functions are :
Synchronizing
Frequency Control/Loadsharing
Asymmetric Loadsharing
Symmetric Loadsharing
Load-dependent Start/Stop of the Stand-by Generators
Automatic Start-and-Connect After a Power Blackout.
Supervision of Heavy Consumer Switch-on
Power Management with Shaft Generator main functions:

Control of the shaft generator circuit breaker and the bus tie breaker with automatic
synchronization.

Control of the connection and disconnection of bow- and stem thruster.

Overall control of the PMUs that control the auxiliary generator sets.

Operation from the Shaft Generator PMU front panel or remotely from a colour
graphic operator station.

:D:a:t:a:C:::h:::ie:'f:2:0:::0:::0:-:s:y:::s:::te:::m::::D:e:::s:::en~p:t:::iO:::n==============~

Doe.no. AU-0190-A /240et94

01

POWER MANAGEMENT

,"""""

\D11N'1C'llll.M

,.

E][;] CD

""'"

SEA

""'-"0;

50

00/$

RIT

OPEJlI'\T1lJr1

P1A~OUVR

............... ....

G1

~
""'"

CXNClED

Pcr... t ..

t~l

oc.

F~

PlJX.

SG fIR BT

[JE]
SrST[Il IlOD(

.. ..........

S[l VM 1lQ.E SPEED


Sf'E1D " ._,
ClD...COl'f'.STM:T ,lQ.l(ll f'DSSHl..E
D llRUSTDl: DIst:l)f[CTnl .....
S1U!N TlR.5TDl 01 SOJfCTrD

....

Fl'JIIiIua.. Pllo(R 1200IcW


TaTl'l.. f'll,(R
75QkW

750 kW

..

-....

I'IOOES

srr rIXED

stT GEN. 0[Sl::ttK:CltO ....


IUi TIE OIsa:JtCTED .
SOO4iDlIZIN; 8lS TIE ..
~lZIl(; SI#'T GEN. .......

~2~

00'00

l.H..C"I11G t OlsntKtT S>t=n S(N

'"
9<1ml<.O<
P'[9..~ .....

,~v

~~
G2
PMU2

1. STNalY
!UOy FtR ST/l<:T

51

u------DJ

1oR1T1f<G ' 1lLNo'1 ..... _ _


DIsct:HtTlNG TH'aJSl!RS

C%JoKCTlNi T~ ........
STIW;llT-STI'fl:T IU. rDl........

~Q.EST f'RIUl'l. tJ'EllATltN .


N) liXRA~ STI'fOO'(

~,w

EJ
aNtlED

IlJI 1Ht

ea-a-.vlnfo.

fl.ld

Example of Mimic Picture

DataChief 2000 System De..eription

ft.ld

Doe.no. AUOI90-A I 240et94

52

7.

SPECIAL FUNCTIONS

7.1.

Introduction

Functions for special purposes are included in some systems. These functions will have to
be customized for each system.
The most common of the special functions in the alarm. monitoring and control system are
described in the following Sections. These are:

Deviation Calculations for Exhaust Gas Temperature and Bearings


Counters for Running Hours and Liquid Consumptions
Noon Log
Fuel Economizing System
Level Gauging System
API Calculations

:D:a:t:aC=h:ie~if:2:0:00=.:s:y:st:e::m=D:e:se:n:'p::t::io::n==============~

53

Doc.no. AUOI90-A /24-0ct-94

7.2.

Deviation Parameter Configuration


NORCOl"TROL

II-OS.Q3

DEV[,\, TIO~ LIMITS PAGE I OF I

AYUlInlUOD

1::1O:16

JS] DEGC

AVERAGE ME CYl J Q

EX 016

:00 DEG.C

4!>O DEG,c
o"".i.ail>" LilTll1S:
011"", 1rm;>c.IILfe:
~lg' "'ml"""1lf~'

:0 DEGC

at
(".=.1
vUl.Jo.lulat,

DEG.C

10.5 DEc..C

........-.... ,-_...

F'l-061<' cO""",I;" .

AV
M

Cyl..i.aokr:
Meuved

~t.l.e"

HO

C.. nectio.:
Co~~<IvallleS:
ClUTtllt

<kvw.;o,,:

'"

'".'
'"

36~

"

'"

~.

Hi

'"
iS7

)57

This function enables the sening of a low limit for alarm blocking. When a cylinder
temperature is below the low limit there will be no deviation alarms. The high mean
temperature and deviation both low and high may be set. See next page for further
information about the deviation.
Profile correction is a function for correcting each cylinder temperature. As long as the
average temperature is used as reference for the deviations. it is necessary to correct each
cylinder. to get the same temperature in all cylinders. This correction is done during full
speed on the engine and all temperatures are stable. The correction can be carried out
automatically. (the computer calculates the value). or it can be done manually.

DataChiej2000 System Description

Doe. no. AU-0190-A /24:0et-94

54

6OO'C
DEVIATIO~

550'C
HIGH ALAR.\1
LIMIT 500'C

HIGH 5'C
dll

500'C

+5'C

450'C
400'C
350'C
300C

250<'('

LOW ALAR.\l
LIMIT 200'C

200"C

(ALAR.\1
BLOCKI1>G)

+ZO<'C 20C

150'C
lOO'C

DEVIATIO;.l

LOW! 200 e
dL

50ne
O'C

fJeovi.1ti<.lO
357C
+10YC
3t

350'C

DataChie!2000 System Description

SC

Doe. no. AU-OI90-A / 2~Oct-94

MEAN VALUE 357'C


CURRENT DEVIA TION

Deviation

IO.5T

high 5"C

-150'C

"" ~

400"C

350'C

'" "
/

"

250'C

200'C
2'C

-1'C

55

6'C

8'C

'"

'"

"~
"-

'"

Deviation

JI' Low 20'C

If the deviation low is set to 20C and the deviation high to SoC. the computer calculates
the current deviation. The calculation starts at low alarm limit (200C) using 20C
deviation. As the average temperature increases the current alarm deviation decreases.
The figure above shows the deviation curve. When the average temperature is 3S7C the
current deviation is JO.5 0 c.

DataChiej2000 - System Description

56

7.3.

Doc.no. AUOI90A IUOct94

Counters Display

To improve the quality of the maintenance planning and to support the decision of
selecting components that need to be overhauled. it is imperative to know the number of
hours the different components have been in action. The counter function keeps track of
the hours in action of a number of specified units pumps. fans. compressors. purifiers &
generators etc. Other insouments like f]owmeters may be interfaced. but ususally special
programming is needed for this purpose.
The Counter Display function itself is a software program and does not need any
additional hardware.
The Counter Display function comprises following functions:
one "COUNTER" for total active runninJ hour / counter.
one "LAP COUNTER"
Print of a table and monitoring with :
tagname
tag description
status. (running / stopped)
total running hour for each unit"s. (counter)
lap time. (lap counter)
Manual reset of the total running hour and lap time for specified units.
(i.e.: when overhauled.)
Manual adjustment of the total running hour and lap time for specified units.The Counter Display is shown below.
1108-Ql
11,30,16
SUlUSCounttr

L.p~oun~r

L.O. PUMP NO,I


RU~:-':lSG
40.00
F.O. PRESS PUMP NO,:RUS.... t....G 2~,OO

70000
650.00

FOO3S
F\l-'006

F.O CIRC PUMPN02 RUI'iSISG


F.\\'. PUMP SO.I
STOPPED

31.00
H.OO

650.00
QOO.OO

5W046

S.W. PUMP SO.:

38.21

8~O_OO

LOO25
FOO36

RUNNLSC;

DataChie!2000 System Description

Doc.no. AU-OI90-A /UOc,-94


7.3.1.

57

Counters Log
."VSEAGLE
KALDNES
COU~TERS

SORCOS'rnOLAUTO\tAnO~

LOG

PAGE I

T3,i:nanr

rIg cksaiption

SUlUS

LOO:!5
FOO36
FOO38

l.O. PUMP r.'O.1


F.e. PRESS PU~1P NO.:!
F.O. CIRe. PUMP SO.:!

COU"'iER

40.00

roUSTER
mUlliTER

31.00

FWOO6

F.w, PUMP ,0,,;0,1


S.W. PU:o.tP SO...:!

roUSTER

SWQ46

DCOOO

AIS

HVLL NO: 10
93-12-27 :1:19:19

roU:-.iTER

C'outuer

24.00
47.00
38.11

Lip COllJUtf

700.00
650.00
650.00
900.00
850.00

The Counters Log prints all counters in the system.

:D:a:,a:C::h:ie:7:2:o:0:0:":s:y:s,:e:m:D:=e:sc:n:'p:':iO:n==============~

Doe. no. AU-OJ90-A / U-Oct-94

58

7.4.

Noon Log

w.s 1tA~

!'IO~COl'<T.OL ... l;TolllAnO~ ...s

ItALDI'IES

"';ll 1'10' IQ

",oo..

f-oo'

t::p.-

r..r..-_

... -

,...,oJ

r,w. C'OOI.JN(] CYL-!'<O.l

D[Oe

"I.'"

F....., COOUl'iO CYL....O.2

DEO.C

,.w. COOlJ.';(J cn..l'Io.J


F',l', COOUl'iO cn..so.

DEO,C

<:01

Drae

=,

F,\\;, COOU"O CYLl'IO S

oroo

F."'. C'OOUl'iOCY\../<O"

D[Oe

t..o<l

= ..
,."'oE 1

OH:=' t:C'''.''

,~

.~,

~::.."

M-CO

",,00

-,

~m
,,~

,*,)l

~m

..:.....,

~~

~~

-,

....,.

"~

-~

MW

SO",
"W

l::.-ml-~~.

.., . ,,,,

01 ....

"1'W

.....<l

...)<),

<>',ill

~m

-,

.,m
.~

,
,
, ,
, ,
, ,
, ,
,

~
~
~
~
~

The Noon Log function will collect data for all tags and counters configured for this
functions every four hours,The configuration is done in the database. The log will be
printed at Noon (l2:()() Hour).
7.5.

Fuel Economizing System

The DataChief-2000 Fuel Economizing System gives the operator a tool to monitor the
fuel consumption and assess the operational economy of the propulsion machinery of the
vessel.
Momentary values for performance parameters as well as accumulated values for fuel
consumption and propeller shaft power during a round-trip or a sea voyage are displayed
and printed for reporting.
The calculations are based on on-line measurements and the Local Processing Stations of
the system interface all signals necessary to perform the Fuel Economizing function.
7.5.1.

Fuel Economizing System Functional Description

The following measurements must be connected to one or more local process units
(SAUs) in the DataChief-2000 system:

Fuel oil flow for each propulsion engine


Both input and output flow must be measured.
Fuel oil temperature for all input and output flows
Running signal for each propulsion engine
Shaft power for each propeller shaft
Ship speed

:D:a:/:a:C:h:ie:if:2:o:0: : 0:-:s:y:s:/e:m::D:e:s:cn:'p::/iO:n==============~

Doc.no. AU-0190-A /24-0CI-94-

59

The system calculates a set of performance parameters based on the acquired


mea~urement~. The performance parameters are:

Momentary fuel consumption for each engine in kglhrs


Total momentary fuel consumption in kglhrs
Hull efficiency in kg/nm
Engine efficiency for each engine in glkwh
Shaft power for each shaft in MW
Total shaft power in MW

The values for fuel consumption and produced power are integrated over the voyage
period. The accumulated data includes:

Duration of voyage in hours


Distance travelled in nautical miles
Accumulated fuel oil consumption for each main engine in tons
Total accumulated fuel oil consumption in tons
Accumulated propeller shaft power in for each shaft in MWh
Total accumulated propeller shaft power in MWh

The accumulated values can be reset by the operator. By doing so. a print-out of the
accumulated values, a post-voyage repon, is generated.
The measurements and the calculations included in the fuel economizing system are
presented on the display.

DataChie/2000. System Description

Doe. no. AU-0190-A I 24-0ct-94

60

NORCONTROl
Automation

11-00-94
12:30:16

PERFORMANCE MONITORING ROUNDTRIP REPORT

Start:

Q4.()816

Duration :

17:38:40

O,lXX)

Distance;

HOURS

0.0 NMllES

ACCUMULATED POWER (tA'Nh1

Shaft 1:

0.00

Shaft 2:

0.00

Total :

0.00

CONSUMED FUEL (lons)

0.00

sPecific gravity of tuel at 15 deg. :

1000000 KGIlI

""sa

Reset rol.l"ld flip report :

Enter new sp.g. value:

7.5.1.

Roundtrip Report Printout


:>ORCO:>TROL AUTO~lATlOS AIS
HULL NO, HHIO<>l
9~..().!-19 17:09:11

MIS AN:>ESIF
HYUNDAlIIEA vy INDUSTRIES co.
RJEL MONITORING LOG

Roundlnp start
lime
date

DC 2000
~

PAGE I

DIStance
(NMILES)

ACL.pO"l~er

Ace.power

TOlal

(HOURS)

Sh./(MIVH)

Sh.2(MIVH)

po""r(MWH)

TOlal
fa.con.(TONS)

255.0

369.8

/0.2

10,]

20.5

237.2

DuratIOn

/
..

sp.grOl'lty

(KGIL)
.-

92-10-23

08..59 ..25

DataChie!2000 - System Description

0.987

Doc.no. AU-OI90-A / U-Oct-94

7.6.

61

Level Gauging and Volume Calculation

7.6.1.
Level Gauging System
The Tank Level Gauging System gives the operator all information necessary for secure
loading and unloading of the ship by calculating the levels from the raw sensor signals.
correcting the levels for trim. list and density and presenting the results on the colour
graphic monitor both as mimic diagrams and text.
The system is interfaced through Norcontrol's Level Gauging Unit (LGU 8810), Signal
Acquisition Unit (SAU 8810). serial line or via Local Area Network.
Capacity or trim tables are stored in the system. and the levels are presented on the
monitor as levels on "even keel" (capa,ity tables) or sensorlevels at actual trim (trim
tables).
7.6.2.
Trim- and/or List correction of Measured Levels.
A level sensor in a tank is normally fitted so that measured level (pressure) will change
when the ship is trimming and/or heeling.
In order to calculate volume from trim-/capacity tables, the measured level must be
corrected so that it corresponds to level used in trim-/capacity table.
In trim tables, the level at sensor and at zero list is used. The trim table is dependent on
the longitudinal (and vertical) position of sensor.
In capacity tables, the level at zero list and trim is used. This table is independent of
sensor longitudinal position. In the so called "tank center of flotation" for the free surface,
the level is independent of trim and list (within reasonable limits). The level at tank center
of flotation is then the level if there had been no trim and list.

The longitudinal- and transverse distance from sensor ,0 tank center of flotation must be
known/calculated at all filling degrees in order to calculate trim- and list correction.
Mea,ured levels are corrected for trim and/or list to a corrected level shown in tank
displays and system database (alarm system). The way the level is corrected is shown in
the "Level Correction Display" system.
The corrected level is calculated in the foUowing way:
Corr.Level = (Pressure[mFW]/spec.grav.) + offset + trim corr. + list corr
Corrected uUage is calculated in similar manner, but is normaUy not corrected for
spec.gravity.

DataChie!2000 System Description

62

Doc.no. AU-OJ90A / UOct94.

7.6.3.
Volume Calculation
The Tank Table module has all infonnation of the tank content. and are listed as follows:

Tank number
Tank name
Tank type (content)
Tank levels/tank ullage.
Specific gravity. specific gravity at 15 deg.C
Volume coefficient. weight coefficient.
Volume in cubic meter. net US barrels.
%-filling of volume(%-full).
Weight in metric tonnes. long ton.

The measured and corrected tank level or tank ullage is used to find the volume of the
tank by interpolation in the tank-curve.
The weight is calculated using the given specific gravity of the tank content.
During the loading/unloading situation all variables are checked against the pre-set alarm
limits and alarms are activated if the values are out of limits. The operator is notified via
illuminated alarm buttons in the functional key board. on the colour graphic monitor and
on the printer.

DataChief2000 System Description

Doc.no. AUOI90A CZ4-Dc,.94 ...

63

7.6.4.
Tank Display and Log
The purpose of this display is to show the result of tank calculation for ballast-, fuel oil
and mise. tanks. Each tank ha~ the following information:
Tank no
Tank name
Tank type
Level

Inputnumber for tank


Name of the actual tank
Type of tank content
Actual level corrected for specific gravity. sensor offset,
trim and list
Actual volume in percent of full tank
Actual volume in cubic meter
Specific gravity at actual tempemture
Weight in metric tonnes

%-fill

Volume
Sp.gr
Weight
DISPLAY:
NORCONTROl
Automation

ll-Q894
12,30,16

GENERAL TANK DISPLAY

Tk
No

Tank
Name

Tank
Type

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
B
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

FOREPEAK
WATER B. I P
WATER B. 1 S
WATERB.2C
WATER B. 3 P
WATER B. 3 S
WATER B. 4C
WATER B. 5P
WATER B. 5S
WATERB.6C
AFTPEAK
TECKN.FW P
TECKN.FWS
FRESH W. P
FRESH W S
HFO TANK 1 P

WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
TF
TF
FW
FW
HO

Level

Filling

Volume

Im)

I'l,)

Im31

O.CXXl
O.CXXl
O.CXXl
O.CXXl
O.CXXl
O.CXXl
O.CXXl
O.CXXl
O.CXXl
O.CXXl
O.CXXl
0.057
0.053
0.060
0.065
OWB

0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
I.,
1.5
0.0
00
0.2

0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
2.34
2.50
0.00
0.00
0.31

Sp.gr
It/m31
1102500
1.02500
1.02500
1.02500
1.02500
1.02500
1.02500
1.02500
1.02500
1.02500
1.02500
1.00000
1.00000
1.00000
1.00000
0.98CXXl

Weight

ItI

0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
2.34
2.50
0.00
0.00
0.31

Enter new Sp.gr. value:

<Enter> :: 1.0250)

:D:a:/:aC::h:ie:if:2:0:0:0:-:s:y:s:,e:m:::D:e:s:cn:p:':iO:n==============~

Doc.no. AUOJ90.A/24-()ct.94

64

LOG:
w; ASSE SIF
HYCI'DAI HEA VI' ISDUSTRIES
TA"';KLOG
11<00
I
2
3
4
5

6
7
8
9
10
I1
12
13
14
15

16

Tank Dame
FOREPEAK
WATER B. I P
WATER B.I S
WATERB.2e
WATER B. 3 P
WATER B. 3 S
WHER B.4C
WATER B. 5 P
WATER B. 5 S
WATER B.6C
AFTPEAK
TECKXFWP
TECKS-FWS
FRESHW.P
FRESHW.S
HFOTA"K 1

7.6.5.

~ORCOSTROL AiJTO~1ATI()'\

co.
Tank ~l'"

\\'R

WB

\\'R
WB

WB
WB
\\11
\\11
WB
\\11
\\11

IF
IF
FW
FW
HO

HnL "0, HHIOM


9.t.O~19 17:09: 11
LevellmJ
Fillingt%)
0.000
0.0
0.000
0.0
0.000
0.0
0.000
0.0
0.000
0.0
0.000
0.0
0.000
0.0
0.000
0.0
0.000
0.0
0.000
0.0
0.000
0.0
0.057
lA
0.053
1.5
0.060
0.0
0.065
0.0
0.098
0.2

..vs

DC 2000

Vvlumetm3)
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

2.3-1
2.50
0.00
0.00
0.31

Sp.gntlm3)
1.0250
1.0250
1.0250
1.0250

1.0250
1.0250
1.0250
1.0250
1.0250

1.02:50
1.0250
1.0000
1.0000
1.0000
1.0000
0.9800

PAGE I
Weightt()
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
2.3~

2.50
0.00
0.00
0.31

Ullage I Level Correction Display and Log

This display shows the parameters used for ullage and level correction calculations for
each tank. The purpose of this display is to give the user a possibility to see which
parameters are used for the correction. Each tank has the following information:
Tank no
Tank name
Tank type
U1I/Level
Sp.gr
Sensor offset
Longcorr
Transcorr
Corrected
U1I/Level

Input number for tank


Name of the actual tank
Type of tank content
Measured ullage or level before corrections (this value will
be displayed at the corresponding DBU if connected)
Specific gravity at actual temperature (left blank if ullage
measuring)
Sensor height above lowest point of tank (left blank if
ullage measuring)
Longitudinal correction for level sensor location (left blank
if trim tables)
Transverse correction for level sensor location
Actual ullage or level corrected for specific gravity. sensor
offset. trim and list

:D:a:ta:C:h:I:ef:2:0::0::0:.:s~y::s::te:::m=D::e:sc::n~'p:tl::0:n=============~

Doc.no. AV0190A /240ct94 .. '

65

DISPLAY:
NORCONTROl
Automation
T1<

No
1
2
3

,
5
6
7

8
9
10

11
12
13
14
15
16

11-08-94
12,30,16

ULlAGE I LEVEL CORRECTION DISPLAY

Tank
Ne"...,

Tonk

UIIllevel

Type

(m)

FOREPEAK
WATER B. 1 P
WATER B. 1 5
WATER B. 2 C
WATER B. 3 P
WATER B. 35
WATERB. 4 C
WATER B. 5 P
WATER B. 5 5

WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
Tf
Tf
FW
FW
HO

0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0000
0.000

WATER B. 6C

AFTPEAK
TECKN.FW P
TECKN.FW 5
FRESHW. P

FRESHW, S
HFOTANK 1 P

Sp.gr
[11m3)

Serne<
Offset

1.02500

0083
0.084
0.089
0.135
0.130
0.136
0130

102500
102500
102500
102500
1,02500

102500
102500
102500
1,02500

102500
1,02500

102500
102500
1.02500
102500

0.140

0.130
0.130
0.075
0.057
0.053
0.060
0065
0.098

longcorr Transcou

Corrected

UII/level

0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000

0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000

0.083
0.084
0.089

0.135
0.130
0.136
0.130
0.140

0.130
0.130
0.075
0.057
0.053
0.060
0.065
0.098

LOG:
MIS A~~E S[f
HYUSDAI HEA VY INDUSTRIES CO.
LEVEL & DRAFT CORRECfIOS LOG

Tk

Tank Same

I
2
3

FOREPEAK
WA'IERB. 1 P

,
5
6

,
7

9
ID
11

12
13

"
15
16

WATERS . S
WATER B. 2e
WATER B. 3 P

WA'IER B. 3 5
WATER B. 4 C
WATER B. 5 P
WA'IER B. 5 S
WATER a.6e
AFTPEAK
TECKS,FWP
TECKS.FWS
FRESH W. P

Tank Type
WB
WB
WB

WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB

WB
\\iB
IF
IF

FRESH w. S

FW
FW

HFO TA.\"K I

HO

SORCO~ll{QLAUTO~1ATlO~

HUll sn HHIQ6.l
9.lM-1917:09:IJ
Sp.Gr
Sens.Offs.
Level(mJ
0.000
1.0250
0.083
0.000
1.0250
O.OS.l
0.000
1.0250
0.089
0.000
1.0250
0.135
1.0250
0.000
0.130
0.000
1.0250
0.136
0.000
1.0250
0.130
1.0250
0.000
0.140
0.000
1.0250
0.130
0.000
1.0150
0.130
0.000
1.0250
0.075
0.000
1.0000
0.057
0.000
1.0000
0.053
1.0000
0.000
0.060
O.oou
1.0000
0.065
0.9800
0.000
0.098

DataChie!2000 . System Description

NS

De 2000
PAGE I

Longcorr
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000

TranscoIT
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000

Corr.U1V1ev.
0.083
O.O~.l

0.089
0.135
0.130
0.136
0.130
0.140

0.130
0.130

0.075
0.057
0.053
0.060
0.065
0.098

Doc.no. AU-OI90-A U4-0Cl-94

66

7.6.6.
Ship Display
The ship display has the following functions:
Ship data display
Tmal tank content display
Actual draught and trim display
Enter / change sea specific gravity
Trim / list type selection

NORCONTROL
Automation

Name
Hull

Owner
Totals 01

11-08-94
12:30:16

SHIP DISPLAY

M/SNONAME
1001
SHIPOWNERS LTD
Type

Weight
(t)

Length pp (m)
(m)
Breadth
Act. Volume
(m3)

Crude Oil general

CR

0.0

0.0

Water Ballast
Fresh Water
Technical FW
Heavy 011

WB
FW
TF
HO

0.0
9.1
4.8
1.9

0.0
9.1
4.8
2.0

Measured draughts (m) Aft: 3.38


Measured trlm(m)
2.23
sea Spec. Grov. (11m3)
11.02500
Trim used for trim correction

219.68
32.25
NetVolume
IS'<: (m3)
0.0

Fwd: 1.15

Trim type MEASURED


Fixed trim (m)
0.00

Ust used for list correction


Ust type
FIXED
Fixed list (deg)
0.00

Enter new sp.gr. value:

Ship data display:


Length pp
Ships length between perpendiculars in metres
Ships breadth (amidships) in metres
Breadth
Total tank content display:
Type
Type of tank content
Weight
Weight in metric tonnes
ACI.Volume
Actual Volume
Net Volume
Volume based on density in air at l5 QC
US barrels
US barrels based on density in air at 60"F

DataChie!2000 - System Description

US barrels
6O'F
0.0

Doe. no. AU-0190-A /240ct-94

67

Actual draught and trim display:


M~a~ured

draughts [m]

The draught measurement~ are corrected for sensor location and sea
specific gravity. The standard system assumes O. 2 or 4 draught
sensors fined. All measurements in metres.'

Mea~ured

trim [m)

Measured trim in metres. Measurement is based on aft and fore


draught measurements if no trimindicator provided.

Mea~ured

list [deg)

Measured list in degrees. Measurement is based on port and stbd


draught measurements if no listindicator provided.

Enter / change sea specific gravity:


Sea Spec
Grav
Default sea specific gravity in tonnes/m3 (for draught sensor
measurement correction)
Trim / list type selection:
Trim type
To be "FIXED" or "MEASURED". To specify if measured trim or
fixed trim (input) to be used for trim correction of measured levels
and/or draughts. "MEASURED" should only be specified if trim is
calculated from draught sensors fwd. and aft or read from a
trimindicator. Trim type may be changed by operator (if trim
measuring device).
List type
To be "FIXED" or "MEASURED". To specify if measured list or
fixed list (input) to be used for list correction of measured levels
and/or draughts. "MEASURED" s:10uld only be specified if trim is
calculated from draught sensors port and stb. or read from a
listindicator. List type may be changed by operator (if list measuring
device).
Fixed trim
Default fixed trim value in metres. Used in calculation only when
Trim type is set to "FIXED". Fixed trim should normally be set to
actual trim. Normally. trim by stem is positive. Fixed trim value may
be changed by operator.
Fixed list
Fixed list value in degrees. Used in calculation only when List type
above is set to "FIXED". Fixed list value should normally be set to
actual list. Normally, list to stb. is positive. Fixed list value may be
changed by operator.

DataChiej2000 System Description

Doc.no. AU-0190-A I Y,Ocl-94.

68

7.7.

Ullage Gauging, Volume - and API Calculations

7.7.1.

Cargo Tank Ullage Display and Log

The purpose of this display is to show the result of tank calculation for cargo tanks. Each
tank has the following information:
TkNo
Tank name
Tank type
Ullage [m]
Act.Tmp. [QC]
Act. Vo!.

Input number for tank


Name of the actual tank
Type of tank content
Actual ullage corrected for radar offset. trim and list
Actual cargo temperature. possible to enter manually

[m3]

Actual volume in cubic meter. calculated from corrected


ullage and capacity tables.
Actual volume in percent of full tank

Filling [%]
Volume
corr.f.
Vol15 QC
Weight air[t]
US Barrels
60QF

Volume correction factor for correcting actual volume to


volume at l5 QC
Volume at l5 QC
Weight in metric tonnes
US barrels at 60QF

DISPLAY:
NORCONlROl
Automation

Tk Tonic
No Nome

11-00-94
12,30,16

CARGO TANK ULlAGE DISPLAY


Volume

Vo115~

eorU.

(m3)

air{t)

1.00000
0.0
1.00000
0.0
1.00000
0.0
0.0
0.0
CARGO
0.0

0.0
0.0
0.0

0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0

Tank Ullage Aet.Tmp Act.vol Filling


(%)
(m)
('C)
(m3)
Type

1 CARGO 11<.1 C CR
2 CARGO TK.2 P PR
3 CARG011<.2S GL
d CARGO TK.3 P CA

5 CARGO 11<.3 S W8
6 CARGO 11<.4 C eu
7 SlOP TANK P
So

10.820
10.840
10.840
10.860
10.860

....

[ill]
15.0
15.0
15.0
NONE

4.430

Enter new Tank Temperature:


<Enter:>:: 15.0

DawChief2000 - System Description

0.0
0.0
0.0
00
0.0
UQUID

0.0

....

Weight US Borrels

0.0

6O'f
0.0
0.0
0.0

Doc.no. AU-OI90-A I 24-~Oct94 .

69

LOG:
MIS A.'SE SIF
HYlJ~DAI HEAVY L'\DtJSTRIES CO.
ULLAGE LOG
11<
Tonk
T'>lk
Ullage
So
Sarne
Type
Iml
01
CARGOTK..I C
CR
10.820
02
CARGOTK.2P
PR
IO.8~O
03
CARGOTK.2S
GL
1O.8~O
CARGO TK.3 P
CA
10.860
05
CARGOTK.3S
WB
10.860
06
CARGOTKAC
BU
07
SLOPTA......K P
SI.
~A30

O.

.......

7.7.1

l'ORCO,TROL

Aet.Tmp
('C]
15.0

15.0
15.0

15.0
1'OO:-"C

1m3)
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
L1QCID
0.0

no, NS

AUTO~IA

Hlll ,0, HHlQ6.1


9.!.Q4 19 17:09: I I
Act. Vol
Filling

1"(
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
CARGO
0.0

DC 2000
PAGE I

Volume

Vol15

Weight

US Barrels

eOIT.f.

Im3J

airltJ

6O'F
0.0
0.0
0.0

1.00000
1.00000
I.(H:)(}()O

0.0
0.0
0.0

........

0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0

API Calculations

This is a function for specifying variable tank content and performing calculations
according to American Petroleum Institute (APl) standards for ships intended to carry
generalized crudes/productsllub.oils or other cargo (chemicals etc.) in cargo tanks.
The tank content in cargo tanks may be changed to one of the types listed below by the
operator.
As the calculation is very dependent of tank content, the listed types in this database
should cover all types of cargo the ship may carry.
The following types of cargo may normally be selected (code punched):
Code

Description

CR
PR
GL
CA
SL
WB
BU

Generalized Crude Oils, cargo


Generalized Products, cargo
Generalized Lub.Oils. cargo
Cargo (general)
Slop (mixture oil!water)
Water Ballast
Bulk Cargo

(APl input)
(API input)
(APl input)

The last item BU (bulk cargo) may be valid in case of OBO (Oil/Bulklore) carriers. In this
case, the level measuring is disregarded and no calculation of level. volume etc. are
performed.
For cargo (tank type) CR, PR and GL, density may be specified a~ API-density, density in
vacuum at l5 QC, density in air or density at actual temperature.

DataChief2000 System Description

70

Doc.no. AU-0190-A I ~4:0ct-94 .."-..

For cargo type CA. it is possible to use density correction method. In order to calculate
density in air at actual tank temperature. the following must be inpuned:
Density in air at specified temperature T ["Cl
Temperature T [OC) at which the density above is given
Change in density (air) for a change in temperature of I gC. Positive value if density is
increa~ing by drop in temperature.
Additional to the above method. cargo type CA may be specified as density in vacuum at
ISgC. density in air or density at actual temperature.
Tank content type WB and SL will only have input for and display density in air.
7.7.2.
API Display and Log
The API display will provide the man machine interface for density calculations and
display the different parameters. Each cargo tank has the following information:
TkNo
Tank name
Tank type
API
Dens.vac ISgC
Dens.air lS gC
Dens.air TOC
Temp.(T)gC
Dens.corrJ.

Dens.at act.
temp

Input number for tank


Name of the actual tank
Type of tank content
API density
Density in vacuum at ISQC
Density in air at ISQC
Density in air at specified temperature T ["Cl
Temperature T ["Cl at which the density above is given
Change in density (air) for a change in temperature of IQC.
Positive value if density is increa~ing by drop in
temperature.
Density at actual temperature

DataChie!2000 System Description

Doc.no. AU-0190-A /24-0ct-94

71

DISPLAY:
NORCONTROL
Automation

Tk Tank
No Name
I
2
3
4
5
6
7

TANK API DISPLAY


Tank

Dens.vac Dens.air Dens.air Temp.m


15<C
1'C
15'C
'C

APt

Type

CARGO TK. I C
CARGO TK.2 P
CARGO TK.2 S
CARGO TK.3 P
CARGO TK.3 S
CARGO TK.4 C
SLOP TANK P

CR
PR
GL
CA
WB
BU
SL

130.001
30.00
30.00

....

0.87569
0.87569
0.87569
0.87569
NONE

Dens.con.t Dens.at
act.temp

0.87460

0.87460
0.87460
0.87460 087460
1.02500
UQUID
CARGO
0.87460

II-Q894
12,30,16

15.00

0=

0.87460
0.87460
0.87460
0.87460

....

Enter new APl :

<Enter> = 30.00

LOG:
MIS AN:-;ESIF
HYU:-;DAI HEAVY INDUSTRIES CO.
APILOG
11<
T"lk
T"lk
No

Name

Type

01

CARGOTK.IC

CR

02
03

PR
Gt

05

CARGO TK.2 P
CARGO TK.2 S
CARGO TK.3 P
CARGO TK.3 S

06

CARGO TK.4 C

BU

07

SLOP T A~1( P

SL

04

CA
WB

:-;ORCO~TROL AUTOMATIO, NS
HUlL :-;0, HHI064

DC 2000
PAGE I

94..()J-191~09:ll

API
30.00
30.00
30.00

._ .....

Dens.vac
[5 CC

0.87569
0.87569
0.87569
0.87569
~O!'l:E

Dens.air
15C
0.87460

Dens.air
PC

T'mp.(f)
'C

Dens.corr.f

Dens.at
actlel11p.

0.87460
0.87460

0.87460
0.87460
0.87460
1.02500

0.87460

15.0

LIQUID

CARGO

.......

0.000000

0.87460
0.87460

0.87460

:D:Q:tQ:C:h:':"ef:=2:0:0:0:-:S:y:st:e:m:D::e:sc:n:'p:t:iO:n==============~

72

Doe.no. AU-0190-A /24.,Oel-94 .....

8.

HARDWARE SPECIFICATION

8. I.

Hardware Configuration

The configuration below describes a minimum configuration including only one operator
station.
Input Channels:
Maximum number of input channels is limited by the number of acquisition units
connected to the loop. Max. 18 acquisition units should be connected to each MCU. this
due to loop response time.
Output from Main Computer Unit:

One relay for rotating light


One relay for acoustic alarm
One relay for start of deadman system
One relay for system failure

Operator Facilities in ECR:

One Operator Control Panel including 28 indicators for group alarms (System Failure
group included).
One Visual Display Unit
One printer for alarm and logging'
One Main Computer Unit

Facilities on Bridge:

One bridge alarm and watch calling panel


15 group alarm lamps
I common machinery alarm lamp
I repeat common machinery alarm lamp
I system failure lamp
I buzzer
I buzzer reset button
I "acknowledged from cabin" lamp
2 lamps for attended/unanended engine room indication and selection
5 engineer on-duty lamps
I "call engineer on duty" button

:D:Q:/:QC::h:ief::20:0:0:-:s:y:s::le:m::D:e:se:n:'p:/:io:n=============~

Doc.no. AU-0190-A /24-0ct-94

73

Facilities in Engineers' Quarters:

Up to 5 cabin watch-calling panels


15 group alarm lamps
I common machinery alarm lamp..
I system failure lamp
I buzzer
I buzzer reset button
I on duty lamp
4 engineer on-duty lamps
I "call from bridge" lamp
I "call from engine" lamp

Engineers' common-room Watch-calling panels:


As for cabins.

8.2.

Power Consumptions

Consumption measurements are carried out at 24VDC for equipment having supply
voltage 18 - 32VDC.
Unit

Supply Voltage

Max. Watt pLunit

Remarks

Signal Acquisition Unit (SAU)


Level Gauging Unit (LGU)
Process Control Unit (PCU)
PCU Input Module
PCU Output Module
Generator Control Unit (GCU)
Power Management Unit (PMU)
PMU Input Module
PMU Output Module
Main Control Unit (MCU)
Watch Call & Bridge Panel Unit (WBU)
Watch Call Cabin & Mess Unit (WCU)
Operator Control Panel (OCP)
Colourgraphic CRT 20"
Colourgraphic CRT 14"
Printer STAR LC lOO

18 - 32VDC
18 - 32VDC
18 - 32VDC
18 - 32VDC
18 - 32VDC
18 - 32VDC
18 - 32VDC
18 - 32VDC
18 - 32VDC
18 - 32VDC
18 - 32VDC
18 - 32VDC
18 - 32VDC
220V 50/60Hz
220V 50/60Hz
220V 50/60Hz

15W
15W
15 W
2.5W

I
I
1,2

7W
15 W

15W
2.5W

1.2

7W

48W
6W
2.5W
24W
280W
80W
110 W

Remark 1; Power consumption each sensor to be added.


Remark 2: Power consumption each input/output module to be added.

:D:Q:tQ:C:h:i:ef:2:0:0:0:-:s:y:s:te:m:D::es:c:n:'p:tl:'o:n=============~

74

Doc.no. AU-OJ90-A / l4,Oct.94

9.

SYSTEM UNIT SUMMARIES

9.1.

Main Computer Unit (MCU)

The Main Computer Unit is an Intel 486 processor based microcomputer. The main tasks
of the MCU is to collec1 and process data from the local process units and distribute the
presentation of the processed data's to Operator Control Panel (OCP). Logging Printer
and Bridge Panel.
All programs are stored on harddisk. but the disk is not used during operation except for
saving changes to the alarm system. set-up of trend. logs etc. In this way no data will be
lost if power is switched off. Programs are loaded into the computer via a floppy drive.
The system may be configured directly at the MCU by connecting an ordinary PC
keyboard. This is described in the chapter Commissioning.
If more than one operator station is wanted. several MCU's may be interconnected in a
Local Area Network.

9.2.

Operator Control Panel (OCP)

The Operator Control Panel. together with the colour graphic monitor forms the operator
station. The OCP and the CCRT provides the operator with all necessary information for
safe and easy operation of the system.
The OCP is divided into 4 sections:
- Alarm system
- Watch Calling system
- Functions
- Numeric keypad
Each section has functional pushbuttons/lamps for easy operation. All alarms in the
system are divided into groups. each group represented by one button/lamp. Active
alarms are indicated by flashing (not acknowledged) or
steady (acknowledged) light.
The most common used functions are operated by single pushbutton operation. no time
wasting menus.
9.3.

Signal Acquisition Unit (SAU)

The Signal Acquisition Unit is a general-purpose data acquisition and alarm unit. It has 32
input channels that can be fitted with a small signal conditioner board ( termed adaptor)
for interfacing any type of ship machinery sensor.
The front panel enables an operator to locally inspect the status of monitored signals, in
appropriate engineering units (temperature, pressure etc.) and in selectable scales, on a
built in digital display.

DataChie/2000. System Description

Doc.no. AU-0190-A /24-Qct-94

75

When a machinery sensor provides an unacceptable output. the alarm lamp next to the
sensor's name on the panel f1a~hes.'
The panel also contains facilities for changing alarm limits and alarm delays. and for
enabling selected sensor conditions to inhibit alarms related to other sensors (for example.
low lubrication pressure alarms can be inhibited when the engine stops). However.
changes to SAU operational data are normally performed centrally at the DC 2000
Operator Control Panel (OCP).
A SAU can also perform calculations on monitored data. for example a mean value of
exhaust temperature can be calculated and displayed.
All SAU's may have relay outputs to drive group alarms and a general acoustic alarm.
which can be connected and used as a stand alone or backup alarm system. Normally.
however. all alarm and status data is fed from the SAU's to the Main Control Unit (MCU)
and distributed from there.
9.4.

Level Gauging Unit (LGU)

The Level Gauging Unit is a level and draft monitoring system. together with a high/low
level alarm system. It has 32 input channels that can each be fitted with a small signal
conditioner board ( termed adaptor) for interfacing the most common used level- and
draftsensors. The sensor signal is corrected for specific gravity. trim and list. If tankdata is
provided. the LGU will provide volume calculation for each tank.
Presentation of ullage and levels. with volume display as an alternative. is monitored for
each individual tank at the front panel. All values are displayed in appropriate engineering
units and in selectable scales. on a built in digital display.
When a level sensor provides an unacceptable output. (high or low level or volume) the
alarm lamp next to the sensor's name on the panel flashes.
The panel also contains facilities for changing alarm limits. alarm delays and specific
gravity. However. changes to LGU operational data are normally performed centrally at
the DC 2000 Operator Control Panel (OCP).
All LGU's may have relay outputs to drive group alarms and a general acoustic alarm.
which can be connected and used as a stand alone or bacbp level gauging system.
Normally. however. all alarm and status data is fed from the LGU's to the Main Control
Unit (MCU) and distributed from there.

DataChie/2000 - System Description

76

9.5.

Doc.no. AU-OJ90-A /24,Oct-94

Signal Acquisition Unit Extended (SAX)

The Signal Acquisition Unit extended for Alarm Monitoring is a general-purpose data
acquisition and alarm unit. It has 32 input channels that can each be fined with a small
signal conditioner board ( termed adaptor) for interfacing any type of ship machinery
sensor. and up to 256 input channels for binary channels.
All necessary parameters for set-up of the system may be altered from the front panel.
The front panel allow inspection of status of all monitored signals. in appropriate
engineering units (temperature. pressure etc.) and in selectable scales.
When a machinery sensor provides an unacceptable output. a lamp on the panel start
flashing. This lamp tells the operator where to find the parameters for the alarm.
The panel also contains facilities for changing alarm limits and alarm delays. and for
enabling selected sensor conditions to inhibit alarms related to other sensors (for example.
low lubrication pressure alarms can be inhibited when the engine stops). However.
changes to SAX operational data are normally performed centrally at the DC 2000
Operator Control Panel (OCP).
All SAX's may have relay outputs to drive group alarms and a general acoustic alarm.
which can be connected and used as a stand alone or backup alarm system. Normally.
however. all alarm and stams data is fed from the SAX's to the Main Control Unit (MCU)
and distributed from there.

DataChie!2000 - System Description

Doe.no. AU-0190-A /24-0et-94

9.6.

77

Process Control Unit (PCU)

The DataChief Process Control Vnit (PCV) is a multi-purpose computer unit for control
and monitoring of different kinds of equipment located in the propulsion plants, cargocontrol plants and other ancillary plants of maritime vessels.
Each PCV is an independent, self-controlled micro-processor system which can function
as a stand-alone unit or as an integrated subsystem of a larger system.
Operator interaction with the PCV is primarily from a Remote Operator Station, but local
interaction from the PCV Panel is possible whenever necessary.
The

PCV functions features standard programs for:


Single pumps and stand-by pumps
Valves control
General-purpose PID-controller.
Compressor control
Purifier control
Boiler control
Viscosity control

These control functions are described in separate documents.


The PCV also caters for customer-specified logic with various sequences and control. It
maintains a local database with the necessary parameters and channel-configuration for all
the controllable units (valves, pumps, etc.). It is possible to inspect and change this
database during and after commissioning of the unit.
Each PCV is an independent microprocessor system with control and monitoring
capabilities for handling 32 analog and/or digital input/output channels. Additional digital
extension modules allow up to a maximum of 288 channels for monitoring and control.
Communication with other units and Remote Operator Station(s) is achieved via serial
data links.
Each PCV has a displayJcontrol panel which enables the PCV to perform its Stand-alone
Control and Monitoring functions, and which is also used for commissioning the PCV.
The

types of individual process signals that a PCV can handle are:


Digital input/output
Analog input/output
Frequency signal from the process (for example, frequency, RPM)

The basic PCV system is capable of handling 32 channels, but the system will handle up
to a maximum of 288 channels, i.e. 32 analog or digital input/output channels, in addition
to a maximum of 16 digital extension modules, each of which has 16 channels (256

~D:a~ta~C~h:':'ef~2:0:0:0:-:s:y~st:e~m:D~e~se::n:'p:t:io:n==============~

78

Doc.no. AU-0190-A /21,;0ct-94

channels). These extension modules may be configured using any combination of input
and output.
Each signal from the process is allocated a Channel Number in the PCU. and a Remote
Operator Station (ROS) can address each channel to read the process data associated with
the channel. The same functions can be performed by an operator using the PCU Panel.

In mUlti-PCU systems the PCUs can communicate with a Remote Operator Station via a
common data link. so each PCU is designed to respond to a Remote Operator Station
transmission/request only when addressed.
Each PCU basic channel is filled with a small signal interface card to adapt the PCU to
any standard type of process sensor.
A PCU is programmed to perform analog and digital input and output signal processing.

All process input signals are converted to the desired engineering unit in the desired
scale. or to a percentage of full scale, for display.
The signal process indications can be inhibited by the occurrence of a pre-selected
condition of any other process digital input to the PCU.
The ON/OFF signal processing for input~ and outputs can be delayed by a
predetermined time limit.
The analog signals are filtered by an adjustable Filter Factor.
The status of all process signals can be requested by the Remote Operator Station
or displayed individually on the PCU Panel.
All preset parameters and preset signal parameters. such as scaling factors. can be
examined and changed from the PCU Panel.

The PCU is designed such that each of its data-links with a Remote Operator Station
(ROS) can be in the form of a common loop to which several units can be connected.
Each Remote Operator Station can select and communicate with any PCU.

In applications where Remote Operator Station duplication is a requirement, each PCU


can communicate with each Remote Operator Station on an independent data loop. This
arrangement is used by Norcontrol Automation in large Alarm and Monitoring systems so
that one operator-station will act as a back-up for the main operator station.
Although the PCUs are shared by the Remote Operator Stations. the Remote Operator
Stations can communicate with the PCUs at any time without interfering with each other.
Each PCU is an independent microprocessor system with control and monitoring
capabilities which allows it to function as a stand-alone unit.

DalaChiej 2000 - System Description

Doc.no. AU-O/90-A /24"Oct-94

79

The functions of the peu are displayed on the front panel. with operator controls in the
form of push bunons marked on the panel and LED (Light Emitting Diode) indicators.
The channel number and the value 'of the selected parameter appears in the peu displaysegments. When the peu is powered on. the display-segments will show the peu
identification number. Also appearing on the peu Panel is the peu function menu. and
the parameters and engineering unit of the signal associated with each menu.

DataChiej2000 - System Description

80

9.7.

Doe.no. AU-0190-A I U.,OCI-94


Generator Control Unit (GCU)

The Generator Control Unit provides complete monitoring. almn and control facilities for
a single generator. is a fully automatic electric power control system for one generator.
Connected to other GCU's or Power Management Units it is capable of handling
generators driven by diesel engine. main engine. steam turbine. shaft generator or gas
turbine.
When connected to the DC2000 AM all alarms from the GCU or PMU will be distributed
to the EngiJ'e Room. Operator Control Panel. Logging printer. Bridge Panel. Cabins and
CCRT. Control and operation will have to be performed locally at the Unit.
The Norcontrol Generator Control Unit (GCU) provides complete monitoring, alarm and
control facilities for a single generator. In addition. Generator Control Units can
communicate with each other to provide a ful:y automatic power management system for
a generating plant of up to ten (10) generating-sets.
The GCU permits reports of power status and alanns to a supervisory monitoring and
control system, such as the Norcontrol DataChief-2000, which may be situated at a
remote location, while at the same time allowing the operator of the DataChief-2000 to
initiate the same GCU "select and control" functions that each GCU operator can perform
at the GCU.

If a supervisory system is not used, a simple remote alarm panel can identify major faults
and provide a common acoustic alarm to indicate the occurrence of any type of monitored
fault.
The GCU perform all the functional interaction with the diesel engine generator. The
power management functions are described in a separate document. doc: FSPM.DOC

Three start anempts will be given when this function is activated. In case of unsuccessful
start, start failure alarm. will be given. A blocking signal from the engine will inhibit all
start anempts.

If a manual stop is activated while the Generator Control Unit is in auto mode, the
Generator Control Unit will check that load on generator is less than 5% before it
disconnects the generator breaker and activiate the stopcoil of the diesel.
Auto start/stop request to the Generator Control Unit will either come from the power
management system or from the monitoring and alarm system. The Generator Control
Unit will perform the necessary logic functions for the safe operation of the generator and
the engine during
Load dependent start/stop
Black-out restart

:D:Q:/Q:C:h:':'ef::20:0:0:-:s:y:s:/e:m:::D:e:se:n:p://:'o:n=============~

Doc.no. AU-0190-A /24-0ct-94

81

Heavy consumer requested start


Alarm initiated start/stop
Automatic start-up will be prevented if short circuit in main switchboard occurs.
When the Generator Control Unit receives a load dependent stop request from the power
management system. it will unload. disconnect and stop the generator.
The following parameters will be monitored and give shut-down on a running diesel
generator:
Low lubricating oil pressure
High cooling water temperature
Overspeed
In addition. the Generator Control Unit will allow the monitoring of up to five alarm
input, which are customer-specified. These inputs may be of digital or analog type and
will initiate alarms and shut down the generator or replace it with a stand-by unit. if the
predefined limits are exceeded.

Priming a stand-by diesel generator with lubrication oil will be controlled by the
Generator Control Unit to which it is linked. The operator may pre-select continuous
engine priming or pre-defrne all the necessary parameters and select to prime the engine
at defined intervals.
The grade of fuel required by each diesel engine will depend on its operational state and
the power-load demand on the generator. Each Generator Control Unit will control the
grade of fuel which is fed to the engine. It will be possible to specify a hysteresis factor
(or delay response) to prevent continuous switching between light and blended-fuel when
a generator's output varies.
When two generators share a load asymmetrically. the grade of their fuel supply will be
switched between light- and blended-fuel a, the maximum load capacity switches from
one generator to another. The operator will be able to select a continuous light-fuel grade
from the Generator Control Unit panel.
The Generator Control Unit has a program that will switch between HFO and DO
according to preset load limits. warm-up times and clean up times.

DataChief2000 - System Description

82

9.8.

Doe.no. AU-OI90-A 12.4.-0e/-94


Power Management Unit (PMU)

The power management system performs control of the total power generation and
distribution of the ship. It includes all the automatic functions necessary for safe and
economic operation of the power plant.
The system consists of several Power Management Units (PMU). each performing the
power management functions of the connected generator unit. The elecoical generators
can be driven by a diesel engine. by a steam turbine or by the propeller shaft. The PMUs
have different configurations and control strategies depending on the type of drive. The
PMUs are connected to a remote supervisory system. which allows the operator to initiate
the same monitoring and control functions that can be performed locally. Communication
between the supervisory system and each PMU is carried out on redundant serial lines.
Interactive colour graphics nlimic diagrams and a dedicated functional keyboard with
roller ball in the remote operator station are used for remote monitoring and control.
The power management system will be adapted to the specific configuration of power
generators and bus bars on the ship. It complies with the classification societies rules and
regulations.

Automatic synchronizing is performed by the power management system.


The power management system selects which generator that shall be synchronized to the
net. Then the appropriate PMU takes care of the speed control, checks that the voltage
and frequency deviation between generator and net is acceptable and finally gives the
breaker a close signal when the phase is equal between the generator and the net.
If synchronizing of any generator exceeds an adjustable limit, e.g. I minute, a
synchronizing time-out alarm is given and the engine will be stopped. If there is another
stand-by generator in the system. this will be started. synchronized and connected to the
net.

:D:a:::ta:::C:h:I:'ef~2:0:00=-:s:y:::st:::e:m:D~es:::e:::n:'p:::t:::iO:::n==============~

Doe.no. AU0190A I

24~Oet-94

83

When automatic mode is selected. one of the PMUs must be defined as Master. The
PMU designated a~ " No.l Stand-By" will automatically be Master if no other master
selection is made.
The bus bar frequency and voltage values from the main switchboard are available in all
the PMUs. The Master mode PMU is the reference for frequency and voltage values. It
maintains a constant bus frequency by controlling its engine's speed. The Master mode
PMU controls the bus frequency while the stand-by PMUs controls the load-sharing.
However. the Master mode PMU always considers the load when detennining the speed
of its engine. When the load exceeds the load-sharing set-point. frequency control SlOpS
until the correct load-sharing is established by the stand-by PMUs. An increase in the
engine speed of the Master generator set will be blocked if the load is too high and a
decrease in the engine speed will be blocked if the load is too low.
2Carbonization can occur in engines when the power load is reduced to a level below the
capacity of the two generators and the power consumption is not sufficient for both
generators to run above 50% of their maximum load capacity.
The PMU has an asymmetric or unbalanced load-sharing function that will force one
generator to run at almost maximum load for a pre-defmed period. while the second
generator is operating at minimal load and fuel consumption. At the expiration of the
defined period. the generators swap loads. The generator that was operating at minimal
load and fuel consumption takes the heavy load while the other generator runs with
minimal load and fuel consumption. This role exchange allows any carbon that has
accumulated in the engine while on minimal load. to be bumed off while operating on the
heavier load. This swapping of loads between the generators is repeated continuously at
regular intervals.
The operator can pre-select the asymmetric function for any generator pair. and it will
automatically go into operation when the master generator set and the selected generator
set are the only generator sets in operation.
'
If two or more generators are running and asymmetric load-sharing has not been
requested. the load is shared equally between the generators according to the capacity of
each generator.

To prevent the engines from responding unnecessarily to small load changes. a hysteresis
factor (or delay response) is specified by the operator.

:D:a:ta:C:h:':'ef:=2:0:0:0:":s:y:st:e::m:D::,,:se:n:p:t::iO:n==============~

84

Doc.no. AU-OI90-A 124-1Jt-94 "'---

This operational function has one generator defmed a~ a master generator and all other
generators designated as stand-by generators. The master generator will always be in
operation and its PMU will maintain a constant bus frequency by conn-olling the engine
speed.
Each stand-by PMU has an allocated priority number. which determines the start/stop
sequence necessary to meet the load fluctuations. Each stand-by PMU will automatically
start. synchronize and connect its generator according to its assigned order-of-priority and
whenever it receives one of the following requests:

Switch-on request from the heavy consumer(s) if the generators in operation cannot
provide enough power.

A start request from another PMU when its operating generator has developed a
fault which prevents it from maintaining its share of the load.

A start request from another PMU when its operating generator is approaching the
point of overload.

A start request from another PMU is determined by the specified load and time
parameters in that PMU.
When the total power consumption can be satisfied with one of the running generators
disconnected and this situation has lasted for a cenain period of time. e.g. 10 min . the
power management system will detect this and one of the generators will be automatically
disconnected and stopped.
It is possible to override or block the low load auto-stop feature. Whenever blocked. the
stand-by generator will keep on running. independent of the load parameters. This feature
is especially useful when a heavy consumer (e.g. a ship's bow thruster) is required to be
started instantaneously at irregular intervals.
The power blackout logic is triggered when the power management system detects that all
breakers are disconnected and that the line voltage is low. 10% of normal).
In a power blackout situation. all of the generators controlled by each stand-by PMU will
start and connect to the bus. The NO.l stand-by generator will react first and connect its
generator to the bus within 5 seconds. If after 5 seconds the No.l stand-by generator is
not connected to the bus. all the remaining stand-by generators will be staned and
connected to the bus.

DataChie/2000 - System Description

Doe.no. AU-OI90-A I 24-0et-94

85

Each PMU is able to supervise the switch-on control of two groups of heavy consumers
to ensure that a switch-on will not cause a power blackout. The PMU determines if there
is enough available power from all the operating generators to supply the new load
demand and will only permit the switch-on if there is enough power available.
If the demand for power exceeds the capacity of the operating generators. the power
management system will start up and connect a stand-by generator to ensure that
sufficient capacity is available before the request for switch-on is granted.

The Shaft Generator PMU controls the shaft generator, the bus tie breaker and the other
auxiliary generators. The Shaft Generator PMU logic is adaptable to various switch board
configuration.
The following functions are available:

Control of the shaft generator circuit breaker and the bus tie breaker with automatic
synchronization.

Control of the connection and disconnection of bow- and stem thruster.

Overall control of the PMUs that control the auxi!ia.ry generator sets.

Operation from the Shaft Generator PMU front panel or remotely from a colour
graphic operator station.

DataChief2000 System Description

86

Doc.no. AUOI90A /240ct94

The power management system allows many different modes of operation. The following
standard modes are provided:
I.

. HARBOUR.
Diesel generators are powering all three busbars. which are connected via bustie 2
and I. The bow thruster can be started as long a~ two DGs are connected. Initially.
when entering DG-mode. two DGs are connected, but if the load is low and the
bow thruster is not running. the standby DG will be automatically disconnected and
stopped. Automatic disconnection and stop on low load is blocked if the thruster is
running or the STOP BLOCK switch in the Diesel Generator PMU is activated.

II.

AT SEA.
The shaft generator is powering all three busbars. Bustie 2 and bustie I are both
closed. The bow thruster is blocked for starting. Both diesel generators are stopped
and standby ready for start.

ill.

CARGO HANDLING.
Bustie 2 is open. One or two diesel generators are powering auxiliary consumers
and heavy consumers on port busbar. The shaft generator is powering heavy
consumers on stand-by busbar. The bow thruster is blocked for starting.

IV.

MANOEUVRE
Bustie I is open. One or two diesel generators are powering auxiliary consumers on
port busbar. The shaft generator is only powering the bow thruster.

It is possible to change from one mode to another and by doing so. the necessary actions
for a safe transfer are carried out.
Always when changing mode from shaft generator powering the net to auxiliary
generators powering the net or to split net operation. the Shaft Generator PMU will give a
start and connect command to at least two auxiliary generators. Upon reception of this
command. the power management system will only start one diesel at a time. The PMU
with the lowest stand-by number will be started fIrst. There is a time delay between each
start attempt.
If the shaft generator is running in Auto and Mode II (shaft generator powering the line).
the Shaft Generator PMU will check for overload of the shaft generator.
If overloaded for more than a predefined period of time. a request for split net is
generated.

There is an adjustable time limit for parallel loadsharing between shaft- and auxiliary
generators. Mode ill (Split Net) request is generated when parallel loadsharing exceeds
this limit.

DataChiej2000 System Description

Doc.no. AUOI90A /24-0ct-94 .

87

The bus-tie will automatically be disconnected when parallel loadsharing exceeds this
time limit.
The shaft generator is interfaced to the integrated control and alarm/monitoring system via
the Shaft Generator PMU.
The Shaft Generator PMU has facilities for remote start and stop. A speed drop function
versus load enable the shaft generator to be run in parallel with diesel generators.
The total behaviour of the Shaft Generator PMU is similar to the functions of the PMU.
When the controller is set to remote operation mode. the following functions are available:
Manual start from keyboard and mimic diagrams
Manual stop from keyboard and mimic diagrams
Automatic stop in case of alarms on main engine or the shaft generator itself
Monitoring of critical parameters when the shaft generator is running. (Additional
function to controller. with its own safety functions for the shaft generator)
The PMU s control the loadsharing. frequency regulation. syncronization. safety actions
etc. for the diesel generators. When the shaft generator is connected. the master PMU will
do loadsharing on the diesel generator in parallel with the shaft generator. The frequency
on the busbar is a result of the ME speed. Parallel loadsharing between shaft generator
and diesel generators are limited in time. controlled from the Power Management System.
The Shaft Generator PMU and the PMUs perfonn the functions for the Power
Management System completely independent of the Alarm- and Monitoring System.
A serial communication line makes it possible for the PMUs and the PMU to
communicate. Another communication line connects the units with the Alarm and
Monitoring System. The status of the total electric production is displayed at the Remote
Operator Station.
The Shaft Generator PMU is based upon the same hardware and software building blocks
as the PMU, but the software logic can be adapted to various switchboard configurations.

:D:a:/a:C: : h:ief: :2:o:0:0:-: : sy::s/:e:::m:::D:::e:::sc:n:'p:/:::iO:n==============~

88

9.9.

Doe. no. A U-O/90-A /24.,Oet-94--

Watch Bridge Unit (WBU)

The combined Watch Calling and Bridge Panel consists essentially of a panel fitted with
texted pushbuttons and lamp indicators. It also contains an alarm buzzer and lamp
dimmer.
The panel has two main functions. One is to provide 15 group alarm indicators. and a
common machinery alarm lamp. whose function is to inform Bridge personnel of the
alarm status of the machinery.
The other main function is concerned with machinery watch responsibility (Bridge. ECR.
On-duty Engineer). and direct calling of the engineer on watch duty.
The Bridge Panel Unit is controlled mainly by the MCU but it is also connected to the
cabins for direct calls and acknowledgement.

DataChie!2000. System Description

Doe.no. AU0190-A I:l4-0e/94


9.10.

89

Watch Calling Cabin Units (WCU)

The watch Calling Cabin and Mess Panel Units contains a buzzer. 15 group alarm lamps.
one common machinery alarm lamp. information of watch call and sound off burron.

~D:a::/::aC~h::ie:if:2:0:0:0:-=s:y:sl:e:m=D:e~s::en:'p:l::iO::n==============~

90

10.

Doc.no. AU-0190-A /24-0ct-94

EQUIPMENT AND PUBLICATION LIST

SAU 8810 Insuuction Manual

SAX 8810 InsUUction Manual

LGU 8810 InsUUction Manual

PCU 8810 Insuuction Manual

GCU 8810 Insuuclion Manual

DataChief2000 - System Description

Doe.no, AU-O/90-A /2.J-Oe/-9.J

9/

(Intentionally left blank)

:D:a:/:a:C:Iz:ie:'!:2:0:0:0:-:s:y:s:/e:m: : D:e:s<:.":'P:io:n==============~
t:

Doe.no. AU-O/9/-A. /U-Oe/-9.J

DataChief 2000

Operating Information

User Manual

De panmentlAUth-42

mp.'

Ketil

o. Paulsen

ved by:

~L-

1994 Norconrrol a.~


All rights reserved
No pari of this work covered by the copyright
hereon may be reproduced or otherwise copied
without prior permission from
Norcontrol a~

:D=a=ta=C:h=i~ef=2=O:O:O=-~o~p=ef;=a=ti=nK=. :In=tfi:o=rm:::a:::/:::io=n==========~

Doe.no. AU-OI9I-A I 24-0et-94

DOCUMENT STATUS
Issue No.
A

Date/Year
24-0ct-94

Issue No.

Inc. by
KOP

Date/Year

CHANGES IN DOCUMENT
Issue
No.

ECO
No.

Paragraph
No.

Paragraph Heading!
Descriotion of Change

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

Inc. bv

Doe.no. AUOI91-A /24-0et-94

ii

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page"

Section

DATACHIEF 2000

OPERAn:"G I:"FORMA no:" 1

1.
1.1.

Introduction

2.

OPERATOR CO:"TROL PA:"EL

2.1.
2.1.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.

AJann System
A1ann Groups
A1ann Functions and Displays
Watch Calling
Standard Functions
Log Functions
Special Functions
Mimics
Control Functions
Test Functions
Input Keys
Status

3
3
4
5

2.6.
2.7.
2.8.
2.9.

2.10.
2.11.

6
7
8
8
9
10
10
11

3.

ALARM SySTEM 12

3.1.
3.2
3.3
3.3.1.
3.3.2.
3.3.3.
3.3.4.
3.3.5.
3.4
3.5.
3.6.
3.7.
3.9

Alann and Monitoring Displays


A1ann Group
:
Alarms
Alann for Analogue Signals
A1ann Detection for On/Off (Two State) Signals
Alann Detection for On/Off Signals with Line Check
Inhibiting of Alarms :
Alann Indication
Alann Events
Alann Summary Display
Alann History Display
Group Display
Group/Alann Toggle Display
Acknowledge alarms

4.

STA:"DARD SYSTEM Fu:"cTl():"s................................................................. 26

4.1.
4.2.
4.2.1.
4.2.2.
4.2.3.

Date & Time


System Information Display
Functions
Net Communication
Limited Access Override

3.8.

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

12
12
12
12
13
I3
13
14
15
16
18
20

22
24

21i

28
29
29
29

Doe.no. AU-OI9I-A I 24-0et-94

4.2.4.
4.2.5.
4.2.6.
4.2.7.
4.2.8.
4.3.
4.4.
4.5.
4.6.
4.7.
4.8.
4.9.
4.9.1.
4.9.2.
4.10.
4.11.
4.12.
4.13.
4.14.
4.15.
4.16.

OCP Configuration
Station Infonnation
Activate Logs
:
Printer Responsible
Printer Set Up
Selected Points Configuration
Selected Points Display
Selected Trend Configuration
Selected Trend Display
Selected Bargraph Config
Selected Bargraphs Display
Tag Details Display
Tag Details Analogue
Tag Details Digital
Clear Screen
Selected Points Log
AulOlog
Inhibit Points Log
Group Log
Complete Log
Alarm Summary Log

iii

29
30
30
31
31
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60

5.

EXTENDED ALARM AND WATCH CALLL'iG SYSTEM

62

5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.

Change from attended to unattended Engine Room


Acknowledgement of Alarms when Engine Room is unattended
Call Duty Engineer from Bridge
Call all Engineers from Engine
Change from unattended to attended Engine Room

66
70
72
74
76

6.

PROCESS MIMICS 80

6.1.
6.1.1.
6.1.2.

Selecting Mimics
One Push Selection
Mimic System Selection

80
81
81

7.

M.IMlC PROCESS CONTROL

82

7.1.
7.2.
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.2.4
7.2.4.1
7.2.4.2
7.2.4.3.
7.2.5.

Introduction
Standard MM! for Process ControL
Analogue valves
On I Off valves
Breakers I Switches
Pumps / Compressors / Fans
Single Pumps / Compressors / Fans
Stand by Pumps / Compressors / Fans
Two speed Pumps / Fans
Controllers

82
84
84
86
88
90
90
92
96
99

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

iv

Doe.no. AU-OI9I-A 124-0et-94

7.2.6.

Generators

103

8.

SPECIAL FUNCTIONS..;

8.1.
8.2.
8.3.
8.3.1.
8.4.
8.5.
8.6.
8.6.1.
8.6.2.
8.6.3.
8.7.
8.7.1.
8.7.2.

Introduction
Deviation Parameter Configuration
Counters Display
Counters Log
Noon Log
Fuel Economizing System
Level Gauging and Volume Calculation
Tank Display and Log
Level Correction Display and Log
Ship Display
Ullage Gauging, Volume - and API Calculations
Cargo Tank Ullage Display and Log
API Display and Log

108
108
108
110
112
114
116
118
118
120
122
124
124
126

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

Doe.no. AUO/9/-A

124~Oet94

1.

DATACHIEF 2000 OPERATING INFORMATION

l.l.

Introduction

All standard operating procedures for the DC 2000 alann monitoring, data acquisition and
control systems are either referenced or provided in this Chapter.
The procedures are grouped according to their main purposes, and given in different
Sections of this Chapter as follows:
I, Operator Control Panel

2. Alann System
3. Standard System Functions
4. Extended Alann and Watch Calling System
5. Mimics
6. Mimic Process Control
7. Special Functions
NOTE:

Section
Section
Section
Section
Section
Section
Section

2
3
4

5
6
7
8

All these procedures assume that the DC 2000 system is fully commissioned
and operational.

DataChief2000 Operating Information

Doe.no. AU-OI91-A I24-0ct-94

2.

OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL

The operating facilities at the Operator Control Panel (OCP) are divided into functional
groups as follows:
I.
2.

3.
4.

Alarm System
Alarm
Functions
Displays

and

Alarm indication and information


Horn and buzzer Sound Off
Alarm Acknowledge
Alarm Summary - and Alarm History Display
Watch Calling functions
System functions and functions for monitoring
measuringpoints
Functions for logging measuringpoints to the printer
Projectdependent functionality
Mimics for process monitoring and control
Process control functions
System Test functions
Numeric input
OCP status monitoring

Watch Calling
Standard Functions

5. Log Functions
6. Special Functions
7. Mimics
8. Control Functions
9. Test Functions
10. Input Keys
11. Status
The OCP Layout is shown below

""'" sm1:I<

olIll1l~EB

@~~

1EJ1EJf:9ffi

~~~O
~~1AJ~
~~~~
1eJ0~~ ~~IS1~

EJ@~

[;;J~~~

EJ~O
~EJ~

IRJON
e"TN5n

JmlJCS

~~~(;iJ
~
EJ~@j~
~)~~

~~~~
~~~~
~IW~~
E!lf3~~

EJ@~
~l:l@)1iJ

El~IZJ~
CD@)o~

(I) rn [jl IIJ IIJ ~ (I)

'~j]

(PDtATOR CXlNTRO.. P,IJfl

0008
0000
800B
GGOB
8oITIo
@)BCDG
CDG8B
'

Fig. I Operaror Control Panel


The following paragraphs will give an operating description of each OCP group.

:D:Q::'Q::C:h:::ie::::if:::2:00::0=-:o~p:::e::rQ:::"::'ng=ln~ifi:or:ma=tl:'o:n==========~

Doe.no. AU0191A / U-Oet-94

2. I.

Alarm System

The total number of alarms included in the system are divided into a number of alarm
groups. Each group is represented on the OCP for alarm presentation. Maximum number
of alarm groups is 28 including system alarms.
All buttons are light push buttons. Only buttons with text are in use for the system
described in this manual.

2.1.1.

Alarm Groups

(Red buttons)
La. Fa. FW. EX. CW.
CA. DO. BW. MI. DS.
Ba. BR. OM. DO. SO.
ES. FI. TS. ST. LS:

When an alarm occurs. the corresponding button starts


(buttons l-28)flashing. and the alarm buzzer is activated.
To display actual alarm group. press the corresponding
button. The indicator stops fla~hing when all alarms in
the group are acknowledged. but remains lightened until
all the alarm conditions are returned to normal.

INHIBIT POINTS:

Some of the alarms are conditional and have to be


inhibited when a specified condition is present. When the
button is pressed. the VDU displays the inhibit points
alarm list. Same function as for all other alarm group
buttons.

SYSTEM FAILURE:

Alarm group for system failure. When an alarm occurs.


button start fla~hing. and the alarm buzzer is activated.
To display the alarms. press the button. The indicator
stops flashing when all alarms in the group are
acknowledged. but remains lightened until all the alarm
conditions are returned to normal.

:D:a:ta:C:h:i:ef:2:o:0:0::-:o:p:e:r::a:ti:ng=ln:ifi=o:171Ul=t:io:n===========~

Doe.no. AU-0191-A /24-0et-94

2.2.

Alarm Functions and Displays

(White buttons
yeUow light)
SOUND OFF:

When an alarm occurs the alarm buzzer is activated. By


pressing the button, the buzzer will be deactivated.

ALARM SUMMARY:

AU active alarms in all groups are displayed on the VDU.


20 alarms are displayed on each page. An alarm is
displayed only once. If the number of alarms fill more
than one page, turn the pages by activating the NEXT
PAGE button. The number of pages are dependent on the
system in use.

ALARM HISTORY:

Displays up to 200 alarms, with time and date. 21 alarms


are displayed on each page. The latest activated alarm is
always added to the top of the list. Previous alarms are
deleted. To turn the pages, activate the NEXT PAGE
button. The unacknowledged active alarms are marked
with an asterisk.

ALARM
ACKNOWLEDGE:

When the button is pressed, "NEW" alarm status


conditions in the above mentioned displays will change to
ack. If more than 21 new alarms have occurred, the next
page will be automatically displayed.

:D:a:ta:C:h:j:::ef~2:0:0:0=-:o:::p~e:r,:an:'n:::g~In~lji~o:r:::1TUl=tj:on===========:~

Doe.no. AUOI91A /240el-94


2.3.

Watch Calling

All buttons are light/push buttons. Only buttons with text are described in this manual.
WatchcaIling:
(Green buttons)
BRIDGE WATCH:

Initiates Bridge Watch. This means that the engine room


is unattended.

ENGINE WATCH:

When the ENGINE WATCH is lightened. the engine


room is attended. (On system start).

CHIEFENG.
ON DUTY:

When this button is lightened. the Chief eng. on duty is in


charge of the watch. when the engine room is unattended.
The ON DUTY indicators in the cabin of the chief eng.
and in the engineers dayrooms are on.

CALL ALL
ENGINEERS:

When pressed. the button starts flashing. and the


indicators and horn on all watchcaIl panels in the
engineers quarters are activated. To deactivate this
function. repress the button.

ENGINEERS
ON DUTY:

When one of the Ist.- 4th eng on duty buttons is


lightened. the engineer on duty is in charge of the watch
when the engine room is unattended.The ON DUTY
indicator in the cabin of the l.st eng. and in the engineers
dayrooms are on.

CALL DUTY
ENGINEER;

When pressed the button start flashing and the indicators


and horn on the watehcall panel in the duty engineers
quarter is activated. To deactivate this function. repress
the button.
Note: This function is only available if the button
indication 4th eng. is not used.

:D:a:la:C:h:'~'ef~20:0:0=-:O:p:e:,,:a:li:ng=ln:lji:o:rma=:,j:on:::::==========:~

2.4.

Doe.no. AU0191A I 24.:0et-94 ....

Standard Functions

Function

Short Description

SYSTEM CONFIG.:

System parameters and functions

4.2

SET DATE & TIME:

Adjustment of date & time

4.1

CLEAR SCREEN:

Clear screen when not in use

SELECTED TREND
CONFIG:

Menu for selecting


for trend display

SELECTED TREND
DISPLAY:

Display trends

SELECTED POINTS
CONFIG:

Menu for selecting measuringpoints to


displayed or logged in selected pointS display

SELECTED POINTS
DISPLAY:

Display selected trends

SELECTED BARGR.
CONFIG

Menu for selecting


displayed as bargraphs

SELECTED BARGR.
DISPLAY

Display selected bargraphs

TAG DETAILS:

Menu for input and display


measuringpoint parameter values

GROUP DISPLAY:

Display a group of measuringpoints

3.7

GROUP I ALARM:

Toggle between all measuringpoints and the points


currently in alarm in a group

3.8

DataChiej2000 - Operating InjoT7TUltion

See
section

measuringpoint~

4.10
to be logged

4.5

4.6

be

4.3

4.4

measuringpoints

to

be

4.7

4.8

of

alarm

4.9

Doe.no. AU-0191-A /24-0et-94


2.5.

Log functions

function

Short Description

GROUP LOG:

Printing a group of measuringpoints

INHIBIT POINTS
LOG:

Printing all inhibit source signals

4.13

AUTO LOG:

Menu for enabling and adjusting time for printout


of auto log.

4.12

SELECTED POINTS
LOG:

Printing of selected points

4.11

See
section
4.14

:D:a:ta:C:h:i:ef:2:o:0:0:::-:o:p:e:T:atl:'n:g::ln:tJi:o:Tma=t:io:n===========~

Doe.no. AUOI91A IUOet94

2.6.

Special Functions

Function

Short Description

COUNTERS
DISPLAY:

Counter and lap counter display

. NOON LOG:

Activation of noon log function

8.4

DEVIATION
PARAM.:

Menu for input and display of parameters used for


deviation calculation

8.2

SHIP DISPLA Y:

Display for total volumes for each tank content


type. Trim I list and draught display. Menu for
manual draught input and sea spgr. input.

8.6.3

LEVELCORR.
DISPLAY:

Display of raw level measurings. corrected level


and corrections for trim. list. sensor offset and
spgr.

8.6.2

GENERAL TANI<
DISPLAY:

Tank level [m]. filling [%1. volume [m3], Spgr


[t/m3l and weight [t] display

8.6.1

CARGO TANK
DISPLAY:

Tank content type. ullage [m], actual temperature


["Cl. volume [m3]. filling [%], volume correction
factor, volume at 15C [m3], weight air and US
Barrels at 60 OF

8.7.1

CARGO API
DISPLAY:

Tank content type, API, density at vac. 15C.


density in air at 15C. density in air PC.
temperature (T) [QC). density correction factor and
densit at actual temp.

8.7.2

2.7.

See
section
8.3

Mimics

Function

Short Description

MIMIC DISPLAY:

Displays mimic for process monitoring and/or


process control.

See
section
6

~D:a:ta:C:h::I::::"ef~2:0:0:0=.:o~p:e::,,::a:tin:g=ln:tfi::o:rma:::::ti=on===========~

Doe.no. AU-OJ9J-A I 24-0et-94

2.8.

Control Functions

Function

Short Description

HIGH / LOW:

Displays mimic for process monitoring and/or


process controL

7.2

RESET:

Reset function for controlable objects like pumps,


fans. compressors and generators

7.2

STOP BLOCK:

Stop block function for generators

7.2.6

SYM / ASYM :

Symmetric / asymmetric mode selection for


running generators

7.2.6

LIGHT / BLENDED:

Light / blended fuel selection for generators

7.2.6

MASTER:

Master function for pumps, fans, compressors and


generators

7.2

I.ST STAND BY:

l.st standby or stand by selection function for


pumps. fans. compressors and genenltors

7.2

NEXT STAND BY

Stand by selection function for pumps, fans,


compressors and generators

7.2.6

AUTO/MAN

Auto / manual (semi auto) mode selection for


pumps, fans, compressors. controllers and
generators

7.2

DataChief 2000 - Operating Information

See
section

10

2.9.

Doe.no. AU-0191-A IU-Oet-94

Test Functions

Function

Short Description

I. Key in an horizontal position


CHA is locked.

2. Key in an venical position


CHA is unlocked.

rn

means that the

means that the

ALARM TEST:

Alarm test on, press the button.


Alarm test off repress the button.

LAMP TEST:

When the button is pressed. all active light push buttons


on the Operator Control Panel will light up.

2.10.

Input Keys

NUMERIC KEYS:

10 buttons for numeric input.

DELETE:

Delete numeric input during an input sequence.

SPACE:

Used for passive settings for alarm limit etc.

ENTER:

Ends a sequence of numeric input I activate editing.


The Key switch must be in the CHA.unlocked position.

PREVIOUS:

Displays the previous page of the selected page group.

NEXT PAGE:

Displays the next page of the selected page group.

ARROW KEYS:

Move the cursor or the high lighted field.

DataChiej2000 - Operating InjorTTUltion

Doe.no. AU-0191-A /24-0e/-94


2.11.

lJ

Status

The status section is divided into two sections:

I.

Yellow light

2.

Red light

OPERATION:

Lit when the panel is


active.

COMM.FAIL:

TRANSMIT:

Lit when OCP


istransmining data to
MCU.
Lit when OCP receiving
data from MCU
Lit when operation on
mimic is inhibited

OCPFAIL:

RECEIVE:
TRB
LOCKED

TEST:
CHA
UNLOCKED:

Lit when error on


communication between
MCU and OCP
Lit when error is
detected in OCP
Lit when OCP is in test
nlode"
Lit when changelockis
unlocked.

g
:D:a:la:C:h:/:"ef==20:0:0:::-:::O:p:e:r:a:t1":n::ln:tJi:o:rf1Ul::l:io:n=========== ~

12

Doe.no. AUOI91A /Z4-0el-94

3.

ALARM SYSTEM

3.1.

Alarm and Monitoring Displays

There are several display pages for presenting the alarms and monitored values. The
alarm pages comprise:

Alarm group display page (activated from group alarm push-button)

Alarm summary page, containing a list of all active alarms

Alarm history page. containing a consecuti ve list of time-stamped alarms


The

monitoring pages comprise:


Group display containing a list of all measuring points within an alarm group
Selected point display (and log)
Tag details giving detailed information about each measuring point in the system

The operation of these functions will be explained in Section 4.


3.2

Alarm Group

All alarms and monitored values are divided into alarm groups. Each alarm can only be
represented in one group. Each group is dedicated to one button at the operator control
panel (OCP). Active alarms will be indicated by a fla'ihing (unacknowledged) or steady
(acknowledged) light in the button.
3.3

Alarms

3.3.1.

Alarm for Analogue Signals

The

following functions are included:


Instrument failure alarms
Low-low process alarms with action (Shut-down)
Low process alarms
High process alarms
High-high process alarms with action (Shut-down)
Return to normal detection with dead-band to avuid alarm fluctuations
Adjustable filter factors to filter fluctuations in the incoming signals
Time delay of alarm triggering and return to normal messages

:D:::a=la=C=h:':'ef~2:::0:::0=O:-=o=p:e:ra:II:'n~g=/:::nfi=o:r::m::a:I':'o:n============~

Doe.no. AU-O/9/-A /24-0et-94

3.3.2.

13

Alarm Detection for On/Off (Two State) Signals

The following functions are included:


o
High process alarms (Open or Closed)
o
Return to normal detection
o
Time delay of alarm triggering and return to normal messages
Alarm Detection for On/Off Signals with Line Check
3.3.3.
The following functions are included:
o
High process alarms (Open or Closed)
o
Line broken alarm
o
Line short alarm
o
Return to normal detection
o
Time delay of alarm triggering and return to normal messages
3.3.4.

Inhibiting of Alarms

Some of the alarms are conditional and will be inhibited when a specified condition is
present. This function is realised by defining a signal as an inhibit signal for a specified
alarm or a specified group of alarms. It is possible to defme the inhibit signals both locally
and in the control room.
An adjustable time delay for each signal is available to extend the inhibit situatioll.

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

Doc.no. AU-OI91-A IZ4-0cl-94

14

3.3.5.

Alarm Indication

Any alarms detected by the system will be indicated in the lower right corner of the VDU.
The alarm tag. description and state wilfbe displayed. Following states are used by the
system.

Alarm State

Text

On/Off signal Open Alarm:

OPEN

On/Off signal Closed Alarm:

CLOSED

On/Off signal Broken Alarm:

BROKEN

On/Off signal Short Alarm:

SHORT

Analogue signal Instrument Failure


Signal value outside Low range:

IFL

Analogue signal Instrument Failure


Signal value outside High range:

lFH

Analogue signal High Alarm.

HIGH

Analogue signal Low Alarm.

LOW

Analogue signal High-High Alarm:

HI-HI

Analogue signal Low-Low Alarm:

LO-LO

On/Off or Analogue sensor taken out of scanning:

OFFSC

On/Off or Analogue signal Return from Alarm:

RETURN

=D:::a:l:::a:::C:h:::ie::1=2=o:::O:::O:-::::o:::p:::e:::r:::all:::n:g::::ln:::'fi:o:::r:ma=I=io=n============~
--------

Doe.no. AU-OI91-A /24-0et-94

IS

To visually distinguish between the alarm states different colors have been used. The
meaning of the different colors is listed below:
Color

States
Nonnal state:

GREEN

Alarm state. not acknowledged:

RED

State changed from not acknowledged alarm to nonna!

RED

Alarm state. acknowledged:

YELLOW

Alarm state. inhibited:

BLUE

3.4

Alarm Events

When a process parameter enters an alarm state, the following takes place.
SYSTEM

I.

OPERATOR:

An alarm list with time, date and


identification is printed.

2.

The alarm group bUllon starts flashing.

The buzzer on the OCP is activated.

4.

External alarm devices are activated.

6.

Turns off the external alarm devices and 7.


buzzer.

Press the flashing alarm group bulton.

8.

Displays the alarms on the VDU in recl.

Press the acknowledge bulton.

5.

9.

Press the SOUND OFF bulton.

10. Changes the alarm text to yellow.

The last three non acknowledged alarms are always displayed on the lower right side of
the VDU.

16

3.5.

Doe.no. AU-0191-A /24-0et-94

Alarm Summary Display

I"ORCO:"TROL
Automalion

ALAR.\!

SU~I~lARY

Tagname

Tag description

Func

G8001

PIAL

G8008

GEAR SEf{V orr... L\1.ET PRESS


GEAR lO L....n IC & LOW PRESS
GEAR LO Fll..TER DlF. PRESS
GEAR THRUST BEARr;-:G lCMP.
GEAR LO HIGH TBIT'.
GEAR B. La START SIBY PU~tp

LOooJ
LOOOJ

ME OIL MIST DETECTOR


\lE LUB OIL DIF. PRESS FlLT.

GBllO:!
GBO(}.l

G8005

GBOO6

11-08-9)
12:30:16

PAGE 1 OF)

I'IAL
DPAH
TWl
TIAH
AX

Value
0.00
9.':15

Eng. unit

BAR
BAR

LOW

(
(

1.80.

1.50.

,OPES )
.60.00 )

IFH

(
(

.60.00
,OPE:-,-

(
(

0.00

Hig li

HIGH

DEG.C
186.00
DEG,C
186.00
CLOSED

AX

PIJAH
TlAH

LowLim.

Alarm

DEG.C

,OPEx

OPE:"
.75.00

)
)
)

L0001

~lE

Lool3

ME UJB orL START STBY PU;\lP AX

CLosED

DIRTY LUB on. TK 2JP


.\iE LUB on. SYSTE.\f TK 12C

LAL

LAL

(
(
(

.OPE:s' )
,OPE:s' )

STERN ruSE GRA V. LUB all.. TK

CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED

OPEN

LOOO9
LOOO8
LOOO6
LOOO5
LoolO

LOOO4

LL"B OIL HIGH TE,\fP.

LAL

STERN ruBE L"~l:R BEAR. TEMP. TlAH


AX
LUB.Oll.. SEPARATOR FALloT
AX
ME PRE.LUB.On. LOW PRESS

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

0.00

DEG.C

lFl.

(
(
(

,OPES )

.65.00

,OPES )
,OPE~

Doc.no. AU-OI91-A /24-0ct-94

This function will display all active alarms.

RESULT

OPERATION
I.

Press Alarm Summary

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

2.

The Alarm Summary is displayed

17

18

Doe.no. AU-OI91A /24-0et94

3.6.

Alarm History Display

NORCONllWL
Automation

ALARM HISTORY PAGE I

Tagname
AGOOI
EXOO6
FOOOI

Dal~

Time

28-10-91
28-10-91
28- 10-91
28- 10-91
28-10-91
28- 10-91

07;O~;H

28-10-91
28-10-91

I CW009
CW010
07;O~;31 CWOII
07;O~;~7 CO M-ERROR
07;O~A7 COM-ERROR
07;O~;~7 COM-ERROR
07;O~;~7 COM-ERROR
07;O~;~7 COM-ERROR
07;O~;~7 COM-ERROR
07;O~Ai COM-ERROR
07;O~;~7 COM-ERROR

28-10-91
28-10-91
28-10-91
28-10-91
28-10-91
28- 10-91
28-10-91
28-10-91
28- 10-91

07;O~;31
07;O~;31

07;O~;31 FOOO~
07;O~;31

LOOOI

07;O~;31 CWOO~
07;O~;3

07;O~;31

7
6
5
~

3
2
I

Func Value:'
Tag description
AUX GE CURRENT
ME EXH TEMP CYL-6
ME FUEL 0 lL PRE.'S
ME FUEL OIL TEMP
ME LUB OIL TE~D'
ME OUTLET FW THD' HT-SYS
ME COOL SW PRESS
ME NOZZLE COOL PRESS
ME COOL SW OUTLET TEMP
COMMUNICAllON ERROR SAU 7
COMMUNICAllON ERROR SAU 6
COMMUNICAllON ERROR SAU 5
COMMUNICAllON ERROR SAU ~
COMMUNICAllON ERROR SAU 3
COMMUNICAnON ERROR SAU 2
COMl-fUNICAnON ERROR SAU I
COMMUNlCAnON ERRORWATCH-CALL.

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

11-08-93
11:30:16

Eog. unit Alarm


OPEN ALM
~60
ALM
0.00 ALM
150.0 ALM
90.0 ALM
95.0 ALM
0.00 ALM
0.00 ALM
96.0 ALM
OPEN ALM
OPEN ALM
OPEN ALM
OPEN ALM
OPEN ALM
CLOSE RTN
OPEN AUI
OPEN OPEN ALM

Doe.no. AU-OI91-A /24-0et-94

This function

dl~plays

a chronological list of alarms.

OPERATION
I.

19

Press Alarm Hi,lOry

RESULT
2.

The Alarm History is displayed

:D:a:::ta:C:h:I:'ef:::2:00:0::-:o:p:e:r:a:ti:ng=:ln:ifi:o:rma:=:ti:on===========:~

Doe.no. AU0191A I 240et94

20

3.7.

Group Display

liORCOSffiOL
Automation

Taf:namc:'
ESOOI
ESOO2
ESOOJ
ESOOl
ES005
ESOO6
ES007
ES008
ESOO9
ESOIO
ESOII

ESOl2
ESOIJ
ESOI,
ESOl5
ESOl6
ESOl7
ESOl8
ESOl9
ES020
ES021

11-08-9J

GROUP DlSPLA Y ALAR~1 GROLP IS PAGE 1 OF I

Tag description

HIGHlLOW VOLTAGE
HIGHILOW FREQUENCY
GROUND FAILURE 660V NET
GROU~'D FAILURE J80V !\"ET
GROU~'D FAILURE 220V NET

Func

XA
XA
XA
XA
XA

GROUND FAILURE 220V ~'ET EMERG. l\"mA

liON ESS. LOAD DlSCOS!\"ECfERD


FAULT OS E~1ERG. AGGR.
BAT. CHARGER EMERG. GEl' FAIL
CHARGE FAlL. 2'OV E~1ERG.BAT
CHARGE FAIL. START BAT.AUX I
CHARGE FAIL. START BAT.AUX 2
WlliDlSG U SHAFT GEl' PS
\\1NDlNG U SHAFT GEl' PS
WINDING U SHAFT GEl' PS
WINDING U SHAFT GEl' STB
\\1NDlNG U SHAFT GEl' STB
\\1SDING U SHAFT GEl' STB
WINDING U SHAFT GEl' PS
\\1NDlNG U SHAFT GEl' PS
\\1NDlNG U SHAFT GEl' PS

DataChief2000 . Operating Information

XA
XA
XA
XA
XA
XA
TIAH
TIAH
TIAH
TIAH
TIAH
TIAH
TIAH
TIAH
TIAH

VaJue

12:30:16

Lowlim. H;gh hn

En:;.. unit Alarm

CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
65.00 DEG.C
66.ooDEG.C
65.00 DEG.C
68.00 DEG.C
70.00 DEG.C
69.00 DEG.C
lH.oo DEG.C
63.00 DEG.C
66.00 DEG.C

(
(
(
(
(

(
(

I
(
(

OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEIi
OPEN
OPEt"
OPEN
OPEN

OPEN

OPEN
OPEIi

OPEN

(
(
(

1'0.00
1'0.00
1'0.00
1'0.00
1'0.00
1'0.00
1'0.00
1'0.00
1'0.00

(
(
(
(

I
)

I
)
)
)
)

)
)
)
)
)

)
)
)
)
)
)

)
)

Doe.no. AU-0191A /24-0et-94

21

This function isused to view the tags in a group. Value and alarm limits are displayed.
RESULT

OPERATION
l.

Push Group Display

2.

The prompt "Select group:" Is


displayed in the lower left of the
screen.

3.

Select group. then enter


or push the dsired group button.

4.

The group is displayed with the tag


at the top highlighted

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

Doe.no. AU-OI9I-A /24-0et-94

22

3.8.

Group/Alarm Toggle Display

NORCOSlROL
Automation

Tagname
ESOOI

F.."

Tag description

ESO(\.l

HIGH/LOW VOLTAGE
HIGH!LOW FREQlJENCY
GROID:D FAILURE 660V (>,1:1
GROUND FAILURE 380V ~"ET

ESOO.s

GROUND FAll..URE 220V !'OET

ESOO.
ESOO7

GROLl}:O FAILURE 220V :\'ET EMERG. NET


NOS ESS. LOAD D1SCOZ":'\ECTED

ESOO2
ESOO3

ESOO8

FAl"LT ON BtERG. AGGR.

ESOO9

BAT. CHARGER EMERG. GES FAIL


CHARGE FAll... 240V E\1ERG.BAT
CHARGE FAIL START BAT.AllX I
CHARGE FAIL. START BAT.AUX 2
WL'TIING U SHAFT GEl" PS
Wl'oTIL':G U SHAFT GE.... PS
Wn-.TIING U SHAFT GEN PS
\\'l."DL....G U SHAFT GE....... STB
WC'DING U SHAFT GEN STB
\\'L'\TIL....G U SHAFf GE...... STB
WL"DING U SHAFT GE...... PS
Wn-.TIING U SHAFT GEN PS
WINDING U SHAFT GEN PS

ES010
ESOll
ESOl2
ESDI]
ESOl4
ESOl5
ESOl6
ESOl7
ESOl8
ESOl9
ES020
ES021

NORCONllWL
Automation
Tagoame
ESOOl
ESooz
ES003
ESO(\.l
ES005
E..';;006
5007

11-08-93
12:30:16

GROUP DISPLAY AlARM GROUP 18 PAGE I OF I

AiAR~

XA
XA
XA
XA
XA
XA
XA
XA
XA
XA
XA
XA

Value

Eng. unit A1J.rrn

Low lim. Higb lim.


(

OPE;o.;

OPES
OPEN
OPES
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED

OPEN
OPEN'

OPE.....

OPEN

)
)

OPEN

OPE.,\;

OPEN
OPEN

CLOSED

TIAH
TIAH
TIAIl

OP......
140.00
Imoo
140.00
140.00
140.00
140.00
140.00
140.00
140.00

66.00 DEG.C
65.00 DEG.C
68.00 DEG.C
70.ooDEG.C
69.00 DEG.C
64.00 DEG.C
63.00 DEG.C
66.00DEG.C

TIAH

(
(
(

(
(
(

F"",

~ET

DataChief 2000 Operating Information

XA
XA
XA
XA
XA
XA
XA

)
)
)

)
)
)

)
)
)
)
)

)
)
)
)

110893
12:30:16

GROUP 18 PAGE I OF 1

Tag description
HIGH/LOW VOLTAGE
HIGHiLOW FREQUE......Cy
GROUl"O FAILURE 660V t>o'ET
GROU~U FAll..URE 380V SET
GROUND FAn..URE 220V NET
GRQU!'oTI FAlLURE 220V ~'ET E\IERG.
NON ESS. LOAD D1SCO:-'l'ECTERD

)
)

TIAH 65.00 DEG.C


TIAH
TIAH
TIAH
TIAH

OPEN
OPEN
OPEN'

OPEN
OPEN
OPES

Value
OPE.'.:
OPE....
OPE.....
OPE.....
OPEN
OPE.....
OPEN

Low lim. High lim.

Eng. unit A!ann


(
(
(
(
(
(
(

OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPE......
OPEN
OPEN

)
)

)
)
)
)

Doe.no. AU-O/9/-A 124-0et-94

OPERATION

23

RESULT

1.

Select Group Display.

2.

See section 4.12.

3.

Press Group/Alann

4.

Each press toggles the display


between all tags and tags in a1ann
state.

DataChief2000 - Operating lnformntion

24

3.9

Doe.no. AU-OI91A I 240e/94

Acknowledge alarms

The alarm acknowledge functions all.ow acknowledgement of separate and the group
alarms apparent on the screen. by one push. It is possible to acknowledge alarms while a
mimic display. an alarm group display or an alarm summary display is active.
There are three ways to acknowledge an alarm

1.

To acknowledge the three active alarms displayed on any VDU lower section.
press the ack. bUllon. A maximum of 3 alarms can be acknowledged by one
keypress. Any new alarms will replace those shown.

2.

Select the ALAR!'.'I mSTORY PAGE. press the ack, bUllon. A maximum of 3
alarms can be acknowledged at the same time. The text turn yellow. When an
alarm is turned to normal, the text turn green.

3.

Select the wanted ALARM GROUP, press the ack. bUllon, All active alarms are
acknowledged. The text turns yellow. When all the alarms in the selected alarm
group are returned to normal, the VDU is cleared.

=D:::a=la=C=h=ie:if:2:0:0=O=.=o:p::e=ra:::1I=n~g~In~!fi:::o=r:::m:::a:::ll:::'o:::n============~

Doe.no. AU-OI91-A /24-0el-94

25

(Intentionally left blank)

DataChief2000 - Operating Informalion

.,.>
.
.

..

~
.

...

, .
o.... aa;~..

26

Doe.no. AUOI9IA 124-0et94

4.

STANDARD SYSTEM FUNCTiONS

The DC 2000 functions are described in the following Paragraphs.


Each operational description is wrinen in two pages. the actual display to the left and the
operator actions to the right.

4.1.

Date & Time

NORCONllWL
Automation

Tagname
ESOOI
ESOO2
ESOO3
ESOO4
ESOO5
ES006
ES007
ESOO8
ESOO9
ESOIO
ESOII
ESOI2
ESOI3
ESOI4
ESOl5
ESOl6
ESOl7
ESOl8
ESOl9
ES020
ES021

1108-93
12:30:16

GROUP DlSPLA Y ALARM GROUP 18 PAGE I OFI

Tag description
HlGHlLOW VOLTAGE
HlGHILOW FREQUENCY
GROUND FAILURE 660V NET
GROUND FAILURE 380V NET
GROUND FAILURE 220V NET
GROUND FAILURE 220V NET EMERG.
NON ESS. LOAD DlSCONNECTERD
FAULTONEMERG. AGGR.
BAT. CHARGER EMERG. GEN FAIL
CHARGE FAIL. 240V EMERG.BAT
CHARGE FAIL. START BAT.AUX I
CHARGE FAIL. START BAT.AUX 2
WINDING U SHAFT GEN PS
WINDING U SHAFT GEN PS
WINDING U SHAFT GEN PS
\\1NDING U SHAFT GEN STB
WINDING U SHAFT GEN STB
WINDING U SHAFT GEN STB
WINDING U SHAFT GEN PS
WINDING U SHAFT GEN PS
WINDING U SHAFT GEN PS

Enler new time "h..m.m":


Enter new day of the month "dd":
Enter new month "mm":

Enter new year "yy":

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

Func

Value

XA

CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED

XA
XA
XA
XA

NIl'lA
XA
XA
XA
XA
XA
XA
llAH
TIAH
llAH
llAll
llAH
llAll
llAll
llAH
llAH

Eng. unil Alaml

65.00 DEG.C
66.00 DEG.C
65.00 DEG.C
68.00DEG.C
70.00 DEG.C
69.00DEG.C
M.OODEG.C
63.00DEG.C

(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(

(
(
(
(

Low lirn.

High li

OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
140.00
140.00
140.00
140.00
140.00
140.00
140.00
140.00
140.00

)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)

Doe.no. AU-OI91-A /24-0el-94

27

Pressing Date & Time twice will displaythe prompt Date & Time on the lower left side of
the screen.
Set the new day and press enter.
Depressing three times enables altering the month. and four times allows altering the year.
Press enter after each entry.

OPERATION

RESULT

2.

A prompt In the bottom left of the


screen: Enter new time "h.h,m.m":

4.

The new time is updated

Press date & time twice

6.

A prompt In the bottom left of the


screen: Enter new day of the
montht'dd":

7.

Set the new day. then enter

8.

The new day is updated

9.

Press date & time three times

10.

In the bottom to the left of the screen


you will get:
Enter new month
"mm":

11.

Set the new month. then enter

12.

The new month is updated

13.

Press date & time four times

14.

A prompt In the bottom left of the


screen: Enter new year "yy":

16.

The new year is updated

1.

Press date & time once

3.

Set the new time. then enter

5.

15,

Set the new year. then enter

The new Date & Time is transfered to the other MCU's in a network if the change L~
carried out on an MCU configuredto transfer this data.

:D:a:la:C::h:ie:if:2:0:0:0:-::o:p:e:r:a:/I':ng=:l:nfi:o:r:ma=Il='o=n============~

28

Doe.no. AU-OI9I-A /24-0et-94

4.2.

System Information Display

NORCONTROL

1 1-08-93
11:30:16

SYSTEM INFORMAnON DISPLA Y

AlJtomalion

Ship information
Nam~

MIS ANNESIF

Hull

HHI064

Yard
HUNDAI HEA VY INDUSTRIES CO.
Owner KNUD I. LARSEN
Funtions

DBU display
Info field enable
Eng. unit change
Reset counters
Set communication
Transmit

Acknowledge
Receive

READY
OFF
OFF
OFF

lo~s

Limited access override

Actinte

Acknowledge

Complete log READY


Alarm summary READY
uvel correctionREADY
Tanking
READY
READY
Api log
READY
Ullage log
CouOIers log
READY
Roundtrip log READY

r-.1imic
Keyswitch
OCP configuration
Dimming
ON
Station information

191.32.23.25-l
IP adress
Station no.
I
Software ver. ~.30A
Software no.
Proj. SW. no.
Proj. SW. VeL
Proj. sub. ver. MCUPI

Printer responsible

Alarm stalinn
Logs stalion
Printer

~t

up

Form feed length


Lines on page
A uta form feed

Lines pr. inch

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

1
1

12
65
YES
6

Doe.no. AU0191A I 24-0et94

4.2.1.

29

Functions

DBU display:
Use the arrow key to select READY. A prompt for DBU nos is displayed in the lower left
of the screen. DBU is a common name for SAU. GCU. SAX etc.. Set 2. to display all 32
channels of the SAU 2 with values and limits. Use Next Page or previous Page to select
next or previous DBU.
lofo field enable:
This is information for NORCONTROL use only.
Eng. unit change:
Use the arrow key to select OFF. then enter. The prompt eng.unit/counts change enable
(1 =0. O=off) is displayed in the lower left side of the screen. Enter I to enable
Eng.unit/counts change.
For more information see section Tag Details
Reset counters:
By using the arrow key to select OFF. then enter. The prompt reset all counter enable(s)
(1 =on, O=off) is displayed in the lower left side of the screen. Enter I to enable resetting
of all countes in the Counters Display (see Section 4.9).
4.2.2.

Net Communication

An asterisk (*) will flash to indicate that the communication is active (Only for systems

with communication between MCUs).


4.2.3.

Limited Access Override

Some ships also have a DC 2000 system installed in the cargo conrrol room and on the
bridge. All engine functions are limited from bridge and cargo control room, and cargo
systems is limited from engine. It is possible to override this limitation with a pa~sword.
The Captain and Chief Engineer have the password. By using the arrow key to select and
pushing enter, the password may be entered.
4.2.4.

OCP Configuration

It is possible to select automatic dimming of the light on the OCP. This is normally done
on the bridge. Use the arrow key to select. press enter, and the prompt enter OCP
dimming status (O=off. I=on) apprears in the lower left of the screen. Press. I to activate
the automatic dimming function.

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

Doe.no. AU-OI9I-A 124-0et-94

30

4.2.5.

Station Information

This infonnation is for NORCONTROL use only.


4.2.6.

Activate Logs

Printer repons and logs are activated or aboned from this menu.
RESULT

OPERATION

I. Select one of the optioos by using the


arrow keys.
2. Press Enter.

3. The prompt activate log (I=on, O=off)


is displayed in the lower left of the
display.

4. Eoter I to stan the printout.

5. The printer will stan printing the log.


6. Status indicatioo for all
change to BUSY.

logs will

7. When the printout is completed, status


indication for all logs will cahnge to
READY.
8. If a printout should be aboned, select
the actual log.
9. Press Enter.

10. The prompt activate log (I =on, O=off)


is displayed in the lower left of the
display.

11. Enter 0 to abon printout.

12. Printout is aboned after emptying the


printer buffers.

Complete log:
The Complete Log will print all

mea~uringpoints

in the system.

Alarm summary:
Alarm Summary Log prints all currently active alarms.
Level correction log:
Applicable only when volume calculations are perfonned in DC 2000.

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

Doe.no. AUOI91A I240el94

31

The Level Correction Log wiU print the infonnation displayed in the Level Correction
Display for all tanks.
Tank log:
Applicable only when volume calculations are perfonned in DC 2000.
The Tank Log will print the infonnation displayed in the General Tank Display for aU
tanks.
API log:
Applicable only when API calculations are perfonned in DC 2000.
The API Log will print the infonnation displayed in the APl Display for aU APl tanks.
Ullage log:
Applicable only when ullage measuring and volume calculations are perfonned in DC
2000.
The Ullage Log wiU print the infonnation displayed in the Cargo Tank Display for aU
cargo tanks.
Counters log:
Applicable only when counter function included in DC 2000.
The Counters Log prints all counters in the system.
Roundtrip log:
Applicable only when fuel monitoring perfonned in DC 2000.
The Roundtrip log prints fuel monitoring datas for one roundtrip (accumulated values
since last reset of the fuel monitoring system.
4.2.7.

Printer Responsible

Infonns which MCU station number is responsible for printout of alarms and logs.
4.2.8.

Printer Set Up

A list of current printer setup. such as printer type and fonnfeed lenght. The later is useful
when ordering printer paper.

:::D:a:l:aC=:h:i1e::2:0:0:0=.:o:p:e:,,:::a:::li:::n:g:l:::nfi=o:r=ma=l:io=n============~

32

Doe.no. AU-OI91-A /24-0el-94

4.3.

Selected Points Configuration

NORCONlROL
AUIOffiaIion

11-0893
12:30:16

SEL. POINTS LOG 1 CONF.

LOG I
1 G8001
2
3

IN1ERVAL

DELE1E

GEAR SER V OIL I:-iLET PRESS

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
I7
18
19
20

GROUP 4 PAGE 1 OF I
08002
GBOO-l.
GBOO5
GB006
(iROOS

GEAR LO

1~D1C &

LOW PRESS

GEAR LO FILTER DlF. PRESS


GEAR THRCST BEARISG TB1P.
GEAR LO HIGH THU'.
GEAR H. LO START SI-BY

Select log number:

Displayed when entering add

Enter log prinouI interval (hh.mm):

Displayed when entering interval

PL~1P

:D:a=,=a:C=h=ie:if:2:0:0=O:.=0~p:e:ra:=:II:::::ng=l=nfi=o::r:m::a::'I:o::n============~

Doe.no. AUO/9/A /U-Oel-94

33

Selected Point configuration allows the inspection of tags in different groups


simultaneously. A maximum of 5 displays containing up to 20 tags from arbitrary groups
may be configured.

OPERATION

I.

Press Selected points configuration

3.

Press Log no. and enter

RESULT

2.

In the bottom left of the screen log


no. will be displayed

4.

ADD DELETE INTER VAL will be


displayed at the top of the screen.

5.

Use the arrow key to highlight "add" 6.


then press enter

Select group: will be displayed in


bottom left of the screen

7.

Press one of the groups to configure.

The tags in the group is displayed in


the right side of the screen. If it is
more than one page, then use the
next page.

9.

Use the arrow key to highlight the 10.


tag and the press enter

11.

Delete function will be for the


operation "Add", but you have to
start from operation point I.

12.

Interval
function.
Start
from 13.
operation point
I, highlight the
interval, then press enter

Interval time: will be displayed at the


bottom left side.

14.

Set the time in hours and minutes

The printer will print the tags


according to the configuration at
specified intervals.

16.

Highlight the interval, push enter, 17.


space, and enter.

8.

15.

The tag is displayed at the left side.

The interval
deactivated.

printout

will

be

:D:a:l:a:C:h:iei::2:0:0:0::::-:o:p:e:,,:a:ti:n=g:I:nfi:o:r:ma=l:io=n============~

34

4.4.

Doe.no. AU-0191-A /24-0el-94

Selected Points Display


ll.o8-93
12:30:16

;\ORCO;\TROL
SEL. POINTS DlSPLA Y I
AUlom3tion
Tagname

Tag description

Func

GBOOl
CB002

GEAR SERV On. L.....1 .ET PRESS


GEAR LO lhUIC & LOW PRESS
GEAR LO ALTER DlF. PRESS

PIAL
PIAL
DPAB
TIAH

GBOO-l
GB005
GBOO6
G8008

LOoo?
LOOO3
LOOO2
LOOl3

LOOO9
LOOO8
LOOO6

GEAR rnRUST BEARL"G TEMP.


GEAR LO HlGH TEMP.
GFAR B. LO START ST-BY PU\fP
ME OIL MIST DETECTOR

ME tUB OIL DIF. PRESS FIl..T.


ME LUB OIL HIGH TEMP,
r-.lE UJB OIL START ST-BY Pl;~1P
DIRTY Ll;S OIL TK 23P

ME LUB On.. SYSTEM TK

ne

TlAH

AX
AX
PDAB
TIAH
AX
LAL
LAL
LAL

LOOO5
LOOIO

STERNTIJBEGRAV. LliB on... TK


SITRN ruBE INl'o'ER BEAR. TEMP. TIAH
AX
LUROIL SEPARATOR FALJ1..T

LOOOl

ME PRE.LUB.OIL LOW PRESS

AX

Value

0.00

9.95

Eng. unit
BAR
BAR

186.00
DEG.C
186.00
DEG.C
CLOSED

Low lim.

AJarm

LOW

HIGH

(
(
(

IFH

CLOSED
0.00
DEG.C

)
)
)
)

(
(

,OPEN )
,OPEN )

(
(

IFL

,60.00
.60.00

(
(
(
(

CLOSED

,OPEN

,OPEN
,OPEN
,OPEN
.75.00
,OPEN
,OPEN
,OPEN
, OPEN'
,65.00

(
(

0.00
DEG.C
CLOSED
CLOSED

1.80.
1.50.

llig

)
)
)
)
)

)
)

This function will display the tags configured in the Selected points configuration.

:D:a:l:a:C:h::iei::2:0:0:0=":o:p:e:r:a:tl':ng=l=nfi=o:r:ma=l:io:n============~

Doe.no. AU-0191-A I Z4-0et94

OPERATION

35

RESULT

I.

Press Selected points display

2.

"Log no:" is displayed in the operator


field at the bottom left of the screen.

3.

Type log no: and enter

4.

The tags will be displayed with


values and limits.

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

36

Doc.no. AU0191A I 240c/94

4.5.

Selected Trend Configuration

NORCONTROL
Autoffi31ion

LOtl!
CA008
2
3
4

5
6
7
8

SEL. POINTS TRENDS I CONF.

DEITE

STARTING AIR ME I
GROUP 7 PAGE I OF I

CAOI ..

CAOl8
CA034

9
10
11
11
13
14

15
16
17
18
19

20

Select group:

WiJI Ix displayed when enlering add

Da/aChiej 2000 . Operating lnjormn/ion

C1L~RGE AIR ME I
CHARGE AIR TEMP. ME I
II.TE~U. AIR OUCT SHAFT GEN.

110893
11:30:16

Doe.no. AU-OI9I-A I24-0et-94

37

This function will configure the tags to be displayed a~ curves. A maximum of 5 displays
(logs) with up to 4 tags in each may be configured. It will be displayed in four different
colours.

OPERATION

RESULT

2.

The prompt "Log no:" will be


displayed in the lower left of the
screen.

4.

ADD DELETE is displayed at the


top of the screen.

5.

Use the arrow key to highlight "add" 6


then press enter

Select group: is displayed in the


lower left of the display

7.

Press one of the groups to configure.

The tags of the selected group is


displayed on the tight hand side. Use
NEXT PAGE to scroll when
necessary.

9.

Use the arrow key to highlight the 10.


tag and the press enter

11.

Delete function will be as for the


"Add". but you have to start from
operation point I.

I.

Press Select trend configuration

3.

Press log no. and enter

8.

The tag will then be displayed on the


left side.

:D:a:t:a:C:::h:::ie:1:2:o:0:::0=-:::o:p:e:",:::u:::ti:::n:g:l:nfi:o:r:ma::t:io:n============

38

Doc.no. AU-OI9I-A /24-0ct-94

4.6.

Selected Trend Display

NORCONTI{QL
Autom3Iion
Tagnnme
CA008
CAOl4
CAOl8
CA034

11-08-93
12:30:16

SEL. POINTS TRENDS I


Value

Description

22.0
1.2
120
50

STARTING AIR ME 1
CHARGE AIR ME 1
CHARGE AIR TEMP. ME 1
lITEMI'. AIR DUCT SHAFT GEN.

BAR
BAR
DEG.C
DEG.C

BAR
40.0

-60

-50

-40

-30

-20

33.3

3.3

155.0

155.

26.7

2.7

124.0

124.

20.0

2.0

93.0

93.

13.3

1.3

62.0

62.

6.7

0.7

31.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

o.

Scale (min)

Sampk rate 305

Enter trend display time "hhh":


Enter trend display time "min":

-10

BAR OEG.C OEG.


4.0 186.0
186.

will be displayed when entering SELECTED lREND DISPLA Y twice


will be displayed when entering SELECTED TREND DISPLA Y Ihree tin 5

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

Doc.no. A U-0 I9IA 124-0cl-94

39

This function will display the tags configured in the selected trend display.

OPERATION

RESULT

1.

Press selected trend display

2.

The promt "Log no:" is displayed in


the lower left of the screen.

3.

Press I then enter

4.

The trend curves wil' then


displayed.
The sampling interval is 30 S.

5.

Press selected trend display twice for 6.


changing sample time window

Enter trend display time: will be


displayed in the bottom left.

7.

Set the new sample time window 8.


The value must be between 6 min
and 120 hours.

The display will be updated and


sampling stans.

be

Nole: The number of samples for each lime window is 120. In other words. if Ihe
sample time window is set to 120 hours. the sampling interval is 1 hour. If Ihe
sample lime window is set to 20 minllles. the sampling interval is 10 sec.

DalaChief2000 Operating Informalion

40

Doe.no. AU-O/9/-A /24-0el-94

4.7.

Selected Bargraph Config

:-;ORCO"TROL
Automation
LOG I

I LOOOl
~

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

SEL. POl:o.,S BARGRAPHS I

110893
12:30:16

DELETE

ME LUB OIL PRESS PIAL


GROUP 3 PAGE I OF I

Ft+
LOIO~

~IE

M
"M;W
LL:B OIL TEMP TIAH

20

Select group number:

Will be displayed when entering add

::::D:a:l:a:C:h:ife:: : 2: : 0: :0: :0=-:o:p:e:,,:a:ti:::ng=:/:nfi:o:r:ma:=l:io:n============ ~

Doe.no. AU-0191-A /24-0el-94

41

This function will display the selected tags as bargraphs. A maximum of 5 displays (logs)
with up tu 6 tags in each may be configured.

OPERATION

RESULT

1.

Press Select bargraph configuration

2.

The prompt "Log no:" is displayed at


the lower left.

3.

Press log no. and enter

4.

ADD DELETE is displayed at the


top of the screen.

5.

Use the arrow key to highlight "add" 6.


then press enter

Select group: is displayed


lower left of the screen

7.

Press one of the groups to configure.

The tags of the selected group is


displayed on the right hand side. Use
NEXT PAGE to scroll if necessary.

9.

Use the arrow key to highlight the 10.


tag and the press enter

11.

Delete function will be as for the


"Add". starting from operation point
1.

8.

ill

the

The tag is be displayed in the left


side of the screen.

:D:a:I:aC~h:ie:if:2=O=O:O:-=o=p:e::,.,:a/l=:::ng=1:nfi:o:r=m=a=I,=o:n============~

Doe.no. AUOI91-A /240el-94

42

Selected Bargraphs Display

4.8.

NORCO~TROL

LfJOO.I
LOt02
FOOD I
F0004
GPC()J
GP004

IIOS93

SEL PO~TS BARGRAPHS 5

Automalion

ME LUB OIL PRESS PIAL


~IE LUB OIL ITMP TIAH
ME FUEL OIL PRESS PIAL
~IE FUEL OIL ITM!' TIAH
GEAR LUB OIL ITMP TIAH
PROPELLER SERVO OIL PRESS PIAL
FOOD I

LOlO2

12:30:16

5.00
50.0
4.00
120.0
60.0
25
FOOO4

Bar
'C
Bar

'C
'C

Bar
GPOO3

GPOO4

186.0

6.0

186.0

8.3

[55.0

5.0

155.0

42

6.7

12....0

4.0

124.0

33

5.0

93.0

3.0

93.0

93.0

25

3.3

62.0

2.0

62.0

62.0

16

1.7

31.0

1.0

31.0

31.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

5.00

50.0

4.00

DalaChiej2000 . Operating lnjormnlion

50

186.0

120.0

60.0

25

~
~.!I

Doe.no. AU-OI91A / UOel-94

43

This function will display the tags configured in Selected bargraph display.

OPERATION
I.

Press Selected bargraph display.

3.

Press log no. and enter

RESULT
2.

The promt "Log no:" appears at the


bottom left of the screen.

4.

The bargraphs are displayed

=o=p=e=r=a/l:'n=g==ln=!fi=o=rma=l:io:n===========~

=D::a:la:C:h:i:e:2:o:0:0='

44

Doe.no. AU-OI91-A / U-Oel-94

4.9.

Tag Details Display

4.9.1.

Tag Details Analogue

NORCONTROL

11-08-93
12:30:16

TAG DETAILS DISPLAY FOR DBU CHANNEL

Automation

Tagname:

L0003

DBU number:

Description:

M.E. LUB. OIL

Channel number:

Function:

LP

Adaptor card:

832.2

Value:

2.13 KG/CM2

Type:

Analogue

Inhibi' DBU :

Inhibit channel:

32

Counts:

3689

ocr alarm group:

DBU local inh :

Bridge group:

DB U al.relay 1 :

Auto log:

DBU al.relay 2 :

Counts low:

2420

Lowlowalarm limit:

Counts high:

3910

Low alarm limit:

Eng.units low:

0.00

High-high alarm limit:

Eng.units high:

2.50

High alann limit:

Offscan:

1.5

Alarm-on delay:

Abnnoff delay:

Filter faclor:

0.15

With this function you are able to change alann limits. delays etc.

~D~a~la~C~h=i:::ef~2=O=O=O=-=O~p:e::r::an::'n~g~l:n~!ji::o:rma~~lio=n~==========~

Doe.no. AU-OI91-A / U-Oet-94

I.

OPERATION
Push Group display

2.
4.

3.

Select a group. then enter


or press a group bunon.

5.
7.

6.
Push Tag details
Use the arrow keys to select a tag. 8.
Select low alarm limit. then enter
Enter new limit
10.

9.

45

RESULT
Select group: Will be displayed on
the lower left side of the display.
The group is displayed with the tag at
the top highlighted
The display is shown opposite.
Enter new limit: will be displayed on
the lower left side of the screen
New limit is updated on the screen
and transfered to the SAX.

Filter factor will normally be 0.15. to fIlter noise.


Offscan is a function used to by-pass alarms. By highlighting Offscan. then enter, then set
I and enter, the Tag will be in offscan. An alarm is created for notification. A simulated
value may be entered in the value field. To exit offscan mode, highlight offscan, then
enter, set to 0 and press enter.
Eng. units high and Eng. units low are the calibrated range of the sensor, and Counts low
and high is the counts value from the DAC hl the SAX. This is called a, raw value.The
SAX has a l2-bit DAC (2 12 = 4096) giving a range from 0-4095.
-110%
ocounts
ocounts

-100%
180 counts
180 counts
IFL(l868
counts)

0%
2048 counts
2420 counts

+100%
3910 counts
3910 counts

+110%
4095 counts
4095 counts
IFH

The signal from the sensor is measured in counts according to the table above. The
second row is for true zero signals (0-10 V - Pt lOO etc.). The third row is for live zero
signals (4-20 mA - 1-5 mA etc.). The fourth row shows IFL=lnstrument failure low and
IFH instrument failure high. An alarm occurs if the sensor exceeds the calibrated range.
SeeSystem Information Display Section 4.17 for details.
The value may be changed if Eng.unit change is eneabled.

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

46

4.9.2.

Doe.no. AU-0191-A / ]4-0el-94

Tag Details Digital

NORCONTROL

11-08-93
12:30:16

TAG DETAILS DISPLAY FOR DBU CHANNEL

Automation

Tagnaml::

AEOOI

DBU numht:r:

Description:

STARTING AIR

Channel number:

Function:

LP

Adaplor card:

801.1

Stall::

CLOSE

Typ~

Digilal

Inhibil DBU:

Inhibit channel :

ocp aJann group:

DBU local ioh :

Bridge group:

DBU aLrday I :

Auto log.:

Offse-an:

Alarm-on dc-lay:

Alarm-off dday:

Operation will be as for the Tag details analogue. excluding the ability to set offscan
value.

DalaChief 2000 - Operating 1nformalion

Doc.no. AU-0191-A /U-Ocl-94

47

(Intentionally left blank)

:::D:a:l:aC::hl:"ef:=20:0:0:::-:0: p:e:r:a:li:ng: :ln:!ji:o:rT Ul:= li:on===========:~

48
4.10.

Doe.no. AU-O/9/-A /24-0el-94


Clear Screen

NORCONlROL

11-089.

Automalion

12:30:16

: :D:a:/:a:C=h:ie1: : : 2: : o: : 0: : 0=-:o:p=e=r:atl==ng=/n:ifi:o:r=1tUl=I=io=n============~

Doe.no. AU-0191-A I 24-0et-94

OPERATION
I.

Push clear screen

49

RESULT
The screen is cleared

:D:a:ta:C::h':"ef::2:00:0:::-:o:p:e:,,:a:ti:n:g:l:nfi:o:r:ma=:ti:on===========:~

50

Doe.no. AU-OI91-A /24-0e/-94

4.11.

Selected Points Log

M/S EAGLE
KALDNES
SELECTED POINTS LOG NO.

NORCONTROL AUTOMATION A/S


HULL NO:310
93-12-27 12:26:58
Eng.unil Alarm

Tagname

Tag description

Func

Value

AEool
AEoo2
FOOOI
FOOOI
LOOOI
LOOOI
MEOOI
MEOO2
MEOO3
MEOO4
MEoo5

STARTING AIR
CHARGE AIR
F.O. PRESS
F.O. TEMP
L.O. PRESS
L.O. TEMP
STARTING AIR
CYL.l LUBRlCATION
CYL.2 LUB RlC ATION
CYL.3 LUBRlCATION
CYL.4 LUBRlCATION

LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
P

24.5 KG/CM2
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEl"
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN

DC2000
PAGE I
Low Lim. High lim.

18.00.
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN

:D:Q:/:Q:C:h:ie:1:2:0:0:0:-::o:p:e:ra:I :'n:g::l:nfi:o: :T: m:Q:::/l:-o:::n============~

Doc.no. AUOI91A /240cl94

OPERATION

51

RESULT

1.

Press Selected points log

2.

A prompt at the bottom left of the


screen: Select log no.

3.

Press log no.and enter

4.

The selected points log is printed.

:D:a:la:C==hl:"ef::2:0:0:0:.=o:p:e:r:all:n:g:=ln:'fi:o:r:ma::,l:o=n============~

52

Doe.no. AU-OI9IA / U-Oet-94

4.12.

Autolog

11-08-93

NORCONTROL

AL'TOLOG DISPLA Y

AUlOmalion

12:30:16

Tim~ lahle:

I:

00.00

2: 02.15
3: O..UO
~:

06A5

5:

09.00

6:

11.15

7:

LUO

8:

15A5

9:

18.00

10:

20.15

Autolog on/orf

OFF

Print demand

MI5 EAGLE
KALDNES
AUTO LOG

NORCONTROL AUTOMATION N5
HULL NO: 10
93-12-27 12:16:58

Tagname

Tag description

Func

Value

AEOOI
AEOO2
FOOOI
FOOOI
LOOOI
LOOOI
MEOOI
MEOO2
MEOO3
MEOO4
MEOO5

5TARTINGAIR
CHARGE AIR
F.O. PRESS
F.O. TEMP
L.O. PRESS
L.O. TEMP
STARTING AIR
CYLl LUBRICATION
CYL.2 LUBRICATION
CYL.3 LUBRICATION
CYL.4 LUBRICATION

LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP

24.5 KG/CM2
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN

I'

DataChief2000 . Operating Information

Eng.unit

Alarm

DC2000
PAGE 1
Low Lim. High lim.

18.00.
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN

Doc.no. AU-OI9I-A /24-0cl-94

OPERATION

53

RESULT

1.

Use the arrow key to highlight the 2.


time number. then enter

A prompt at the bottomleft of the


screen: enter new time

3.

Enter new time

4.

The screen is updated with the new


time

5.

Use the arrow key to highlight the 6.


Autolog on/off. then enter

A prompt at the bottom left of the


screen: on=! off=O

7.

Enter I

9.

Use the arrow key to highlight the 10.


print demand, then enter

DalaChief2000 - Operating Informalion

8.

The screen is updated. to ON


The auto!og function is be activated.

54

Doc.no. AU-OI9I-A /24-0ct-94

4.13.

Inhibit Points Log

MIS EAGLE
KALDNES
INHIBIT POINTS LOG

NORCONTROL AUTOMATION NS
HULL NO: 10
931227 12:16:58

Func Value

Tagname

Tag description

IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN

BLOCKL'IG OF ALARM ME XA
F.O. PRESS
XA
F.O. TEMP
XA
L.O. PRESS
XA
L.O. TEMP
XA
CYL.1 LUBRICATION
XA
CYL.2 LUBRICATION
XA
CYL.3 LUBRICATION
XA
CYL.4 LUBRICATION
XA

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009

DataChief2000 . Operating Information

Eng.unit Alarm

CLOSED
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN

DC2000

PAGE I

Low Lim. Hig.h lim.

OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN

(
(
(
(
(

(
(
(

)
)
)
)
)

)
)
)
)

55

Doe.no. AUOI91A I 240el94

OPERATION
I.

Press inhibit log

DalaChief2000 . Operating InforlTUllion

RESULT
2.

The inhibit log is printed.

...
,

~ ;.~o~'
~
..'

D'

Doe.no. AU-O/9/-A 124-0et-94

56

4.14.

Group Log
SORCOSTROL ALTO..lA nos
HULL so; 10

MIS EAGLE

KALDSES

ESOO2
ESOOJ

ESIX
ES005
ESOO6

HIGHA,.Q\\' VOLTAGE
I-UGHA.l)\l,,' FREQUENCY
GROUl'O FAILURE b6QV SET

GROUSD FAlLURE 380V l"ET

ESOO8

GROUND F \/LURE 2:!OV NET


GROLiSD FAILURE :UOv SET BIERG. SET
SO.'o' ESS. LOAD DISCO:-'~'ECTED
FAULT OS EMERG.AGGR.

"009

BAT.OIARGER EMERG. GEl" FAlL

ESOOi

PA~E

93-1227 1:;]0:58

GROUP LOG

"001

.vs

~ov

E."IERG.BAT

XA
XA
XA

XA
XA
XA
XA

XA
XA
XA

ESOlO

CHARGE FAIL

ESOIl
ES012

CHARGE FAIL START BAT.AUX 1


CHARGE FAlL. START BAT,AUX 2

ES013
ES01-i
ESOl 5

\\1SOII'G U SHAfT GES PS


\Vl,....DI~G U SHAfT GE!'! PS

TlAH

Y.l:-'U1SG U SHAFT GEN PS

TlAH

XA
TlAH
TlAH

ClOSED

nOSED
noSED
CLOSED
Q.OSED

nOSED
nOSED

OPEN
OPEN
OPES
OPE!\'
OPES
OPES
OPES

C1.0SED

OPES

Q.OSED

OPES
OPES
OPEN

C1.0SED
(1.05EO
0.00 DEG.C
000 DEG.C

\1.00 DEG.C
O.OODEG.C

l~O.OO

loW.DO

' ' .00

140.00
140.00

=D:::a=t=a=C=h=ie='f=2:::0=O=O=-=0~p:e:,.,=a=ti=n:g=/:nfi:o:r:::ma=tl:'o:::n============~

Doe.no. AU-OI9IA /240et-94

OPERATION

RESULT

2.

1.

Press Group log

3.

Press one of the alarm group buttons. 4.


then enter

DataChief2000 Operating Information

57

A prompt at the bottom left of the


screen: Select group no.
The group log is printed.

Doc.no. AUOI9IA I 240ct94

58

4.15.

Complete Log

M/S EAGLE
KALDNES
COMPLETE LOG

NORCONTROL AUTOMATION NS
HULL NO: 10
93-12-27 12:16:45

Tagname

Tag description

Func Value

ABlOI
AEOO2
FOOOI
FOOOI
LOOOl
LOOOl
MEOOI
MEOO2
MBlO3
MEOO4
MEOO5

STARTING AIR
CHARGEAlR
F.O. PRESS
F.O. TEMP
L.O. PRESS
L.O. TEMP
STARTING AIR
CYL.l LUBRICATION
CYL.2 LUBRICATION
CYL.3 LUBRICATION
CYL.4 LUBRICATION

LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
P

DataChief2000 . Operating Information

OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN

Eng.unit

DC2000
PAGE 1

Alarm

Low Lim. High lim_

OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN

)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)

Doe.no. AU-OJ9J-A /240el94

OPERATION

59

RESULT
2.

1.

Press System Config.

3.

Select Complete log by using the 4.


arrow key. then press enter

The System Infomlation Display is


displayed
A prompt to activate Complete log
(I =on. O=Off) at the bottom left of

the screen..
5.

Select I to get a printout

:D:a:l:aC::h:ie:i: : 2: : o:0:0:-: : :op: :e: r: :a: :ti: g:n::J:nfo: :",:r:maI= =io=n============~

60

Doe.no. AU-O/9/-A /240et-94

4.16.

Alarm Summary Log

M/S EAGLE
KALDNES
ALARM SUMMARY LOG

NORCOi'TROL AUTOMATION NS
HULL NO: 10
93-12-27 21:15:17

Tagname

Tag description

Func

Valut:

AEOOI
AEOO2
FOOOl
FOOOI
LOOOl
LOOOl
MEOOI
MEOO2
MEOO3
MEOO4
MEOO5

STARTING AIR
CHARGE AIR
F.O. PRESS
F.O. TEMP
L.O. PRESS
L.O. TEMP
STARTING AIR
CYL.1 LUBRICATION
CYL.2 LUBRICATION
CYL.3 LUBRICATION
CYLA LUBRICATION

LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
LP
P

OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN

En~.unil

DC2000
PAGE 1

Alarm

Low Lim. High lim.

OPEN
OPEN
OPEJ'I
OPEJ'I
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN

(
(
(

(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(

)
)

)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)

:D:::a:ta:C:=h:ie:if:2::::0::::0:0:-=O:::p:::e:ra:t1:n::g=:/n:'fi:o:r:m:a:tl=o:n============~

Doe.no. AU-0191-A /24-0et-94

OPERATION

RESULT

I.

Press System lnfonnation Display

3.

Select Alarm Summary log by using 4.


the arrow key. then press enter

5.

Select I to get a printout

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

61

2.

The System Infonnation Display is


displayed
A prompt to activate
Summary log(l =on. O=Off)
bottom left of the display.

Alarm
at the

62

Doe.no. AU-O/9/-A /240et-94

S.

EXTENDED ALARM AND

W ATeH CALLING SYSTEM

The purpose of this system is to transfer the responsibility from the engine control room to
the bridge, duty engineer cabin and mess room when the unmanned machinery period
starts.
The transfer of the responsibility is requested by the operator in the engine control room
and accepted by the operator on the bridge.
One of the engineers must be selected

a~

dUly engineer.

""'hen the alanm system is in bridge mode. the bridge panel. duty engineer cabin unit and
mess units will be active, and all aJanms will be transferred to these units.
Call duty engineer is included in the watch calling system and have two functions.

Call duty engineers from bridge.


Call all engineers from engine control room.

The functions are independent of watch mode and may be used both in engine mode and
bridge mode.
The Watch Bridge Unit (WBU) and theWatch Calling Unit (WCU) layout are shown on
the next two pages, and their operation is explained on the following pages.

=D:::a=t=a:C=h=ie~1=2=O=O=O:.~o~'P:::e=r=atl::ng=/n:tfi:o=r=m=a:t=io=n============~

Doe.no. AU-0191-A /24-0et-94

WBU

~
~

Wetch Bridge Unit

....

"""

lit""
100

"au
100

....<".\

lRlll.6
100

"""
""""
m
""" """
""""'"

100

100

I~'l
Sll.1A1J
100

63

lit""

""""'"
......

....
"[)
-""

100

!I1.lJll0
100

llR.Qtl.

(&JOO[I]~OO

00000
00000
[!]G0~H!]
0

0
Fig. 2 Watch Bridge Unit (WBU)

:D:a:ta:C~h: :I:"eJ=2:0:0:0=-=O:p:e:,.,:a:li:ng=ln:lji:o: :rma=:ti :on=========== ~

64

Doe.no. AUOI9IA /24-0et-94

r?

(/

0000 0 00aID
0000 0 OO~
0000 0 000
ooo 0 OO~
weD

SAfE

rffTY

WOOTY

ERRCIl

oUTO...... TiON

~@]@)
!UilII

0000:

lf9B

Watch Calling UnIt

WTY

WlY

AL\RW

OB~

/J
Fig. 3 Watch Calling Unit (WCU)

DataChief2000 Operating Information

Doe.no. AUOI91A /24-0et-94

(Intentionally blank)

:D:a:ta:C:h:I:"ef::20:O:O:::"=o=p=e=r=all='n:g=ln:!ji=o:rma==tio=n===========~

65

66

5.1.

Doe.no. AU-O/9/-A /24-0e/-94

Change from attended to unattended Engine Room

BRIDGE
WATCH

lENG.
ON DUTY

CHIEF
ENG.

CALL

WATCH

ON DUTY

ENG.

2ENG.
ON DUTY

3ENG.
ON DUTY

All

4ENG.
ON DUTY

Indication on OCP . Engine Room

CJ ~A=l=AR=M::::::'j
COMMON

00

Indication on Cabin unit

CHIEF
ENG.

loST

2.ND

3.RD

ENG.

ENG.

ENG.

ON DUTY

ON DUTY

ON DUTY

ON DUTY

4.TH
ENG.
ON DUTY

COMMON

ALARM

REPEAT
ALARM

BRIDGE

WATCH

ENGINE
WATCH

Indication on Bridge unit

:D:::a:/:a:C:h:ie:i :2:0:::0:::0=-:O:p:::e:,,:a:ti:n:g:/:nfi:o:":tna::::/:io:n============

Doe.no. AU-0191A IU-Oet94

OPERATION
1.

67

RESULT

Push the button for the engmeers 2.


responsible for the watch.

The push buttons lights up.

3.

The indicator "ON DUTY" lights up


at the cabin.

4.

The indicator "Eng. on duty" lights


up on the bridge panel.

:D:a:t:aC:h:':::'ef~20:0:0=.:o=pe:,,:a==ti:ng~ln:'fi:o:r:ma=ti:o:n===========~

Doc.no. AUO/9/A IUOcl94

68

BRIDGE
WATCH

lENG.
ON DUTY

CHIEF

WATCH

ENG.
ON DUTY

2ENG.
ON DUTY

3ENG.
ON DUTY

CAll
ALL
ENG.

4ENG.
ON DUTY

Indication on OCP - Engine Room

r;:-'l

COMMON
ALARM

CJ

Indication on Cabin unit

CHIEF

1.5T

ENG.

ENG.

ON DUTY

ON DUTY

2.ND
ENG.
ON DUTY

3.RD
ENG.
ON DUTY

4.TH
ENG.
ON DUTY

~OMMON
ALARM

REPEAT
ALARM

BRIDGE
WATCH

ENGINE
WATCH

Indication on Bridge unit

:D:::a:l:a:C:h:ie:1:2:0:0:0=.:O:p:e:T:a:ti:ng:::/:nfi:o:T:Tnll::I:io:n============ ~

69

Doe.no. AUOI9IA /24-0et-94

RESULT

OPERATION
I.

Push "Bridge watch" at the OCP in 2.


the engine room

4.

Push the "Bridge Watch" button on


the Bridge unit.

DataChief2000 . Operating Information

The push button


buzzer is activated.

lighL~

and the

3.

The push button Bridge Watch lighL~


up on the Bridge unit and the buzzer
is activated

5.

The buzzers on OCP and Bridge unit


are deactivated.

70

5.2.

Doe.no. AU0191A I 24-0et-94

Acknowledgement of Alarms when Engine Room is unattended

l::J

SEl

COMMON
\:::A=L=A=RM::::::'.J

Cabin unit

COMMON
ALARM

REPEAT
ALARM

BRIDGE
WATCH

ENGINE

WATCH

ElS

SYSTEM
FAILURE

CALL
DUTY
NGINEER

Bridge unit

OCP Engine Room

DataChief 2000 - Operating Infor11Ultion

Doc.no. AU-OI91A /24-0cl-94

OPERATION

7l

RESULT

l.

Push Sound Off on the Cabin Unit

2.

The buzzer is deactivated.

3.

Push Sound Off on the Bridge Unit

4.

The buzzer is deactivated.

5.

Push Sound Off and Alarm Ack. on 6.


the OCP in the Engine Room.

The buzzer is deactivated. and the


alarm is acknowledged.

If the engineer does not acknowledge the alarm in the engine room within 3 minutes. the
repeat alarm is activated on the bridge.

:o:p:e:ra:t1:n:g:/=n=!ji:o=rma=l:io:n===========~

:D::a:la:C:h:i:ef:2:0:0:0=-

72

5.3.

Doe.no. AU-OI9I-A 124-0et-94

Call Duty Engineer from Bridge

SYSTEM
FAILURE

DUTY

"",""-,,ENGINEER

Bridge Unit

o
o
o
o

CALL
FROM
BRIDGE

CALL
FROM
ENGINE

COMM.
ERROR

r::'1
l::.J ~A=l=A=RM:::::')
COMMON

Cabin Unit

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

]]

Doe.no. AUOI9IA I 240et94

73

Operation from Bridge

OPERATION
I.

Push "Call Duty Engineer"

RESULT
2.

The indicator "Call Duty Engineer"


light,> up.

3.

The buzzer and "Call from Bridge"


indicator will flash in the duty
engineers cabin.

Operation from Cabin


OPERATION

I.

Push Sound Off

DataChief2000 . Operating Information

RESULT

2.

The buzzer is deactivated.

74

5.4.

Doc.no. AU-O/9/-A / U-Oct-94

Call all Engineers from Engine

BRIDGE
WATCH

lENG.
ON DUTY

CHIEF

CAll

WATCH

ENG.
ON DUTY

ENG.

2ENG.
ON DUTY

JENG.
ON DUTY

ALL

4ENG.
ON DUTY

OCP Engine Room

o
o
o
o
r71

CALL
FROM
BRIDGE

CALL
FROM
ENGINE

COMM.
ERROR

BB

l::.J ~A=L=A=RM~'J
COMMON

Cabin Unit

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

Doe.no. AUOI91A /240et-94

75

Operation from OCP Engine Room

RESULT

OPERATION
I.

Push "Call all engineers" on the


OCP panel.

2.

The "Call all Engineers" indicator


lights up on the OCP.

3.

The "Call from Engine" indicator


will flash on all cabins and
mess/day rooms and the buzzer is
activated.

Operation from Cabin/Mess/Dayroom

OPERATION
I.

The "Call from Engine" indicator will 2.


flash. Push Sound Off

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

RESULT
The buzzer is deactivated.

76

5.5.

Doe.no. AUOI9IA /240el94

Change from unattended to attended Ellgine Room

El

BRIDGE
WATCH

WATCH

CHIEF
ENG.

CALL
ALL

ON DUTY

ENG.

lENG.

2ENG.

3ENG.

4ENG.

ON DUTY

ON DUTY

ON DUTY

ON DUTY

Indication on OCP - Engine Room

r;,

COMMON

CJ ~A=L=AR=M~')
Indication on Cabin unit

CHIEF
ENG.
ON DUTY

1.ST
ENG.
ON DUTY

:l.ND
ENG.
ON DUTY

3.RO
ENG.
ON DUTY

COMMON
ALARM

REPEAT
ALARM

BRIDGE
WATCH

ENGINE
WATCH

Indication on Bridge unit

DalaCIzief2000 Operating Information

4.TH
ENG.
ON DUTY

Doe.no. AU-OI91A I 240et94

OPERATION
1.

4,

Push Engine watch at the


engine room

77

RESULT

ocr

in 2.

The push button lights up and the


buzzer will be activated

3.

The push button "Engine Watch'"will


fla'ih on the Bridge unit and the
buzzer is activated

Push the "Engine Watch'" button on 5,


the Bridge unit.

The buzzer on
is deacti vated

ocr and

Bridge unit

:D:a:ta: C: hl:'fe::2: 0: 0: 0:-: : o:p:e: ra:t1:'n:g::ln:ifi:o:r:ma::t1:'o:n============~

Doe.no. AU-OI91-A /24-0cl-94

78

BRIDGE
WATCH

El

ON DUTY

CALL

CHIEF
ENG.

ALL
ENG.

WATCH

ON DUTY

2ENG.
ON DUTY

3ENG.

4ENG.

ON DUTY

ON DUTY

Indication on OCP - Engine Room

COMMON

ALARM

r=l

L:J

Indication on Cabin unit

CHIEF

loST

2.ND

ENG.

ENG.

ENG.

3.RD
ENG.

ON DUTY

ON DUTY

ON DUTY

ON DUTY

4.TH
ENG.
ON DUTY

COMMON

ALARM

REPEAT
ALARM

BRIDGE

WATCH

ENGINE
WATCH

Indication on Bridge unit

:D:a:l:::aC=hl:"ef::::20:0:0=-:0:p:e:r:a:li:n:g:ln:'fi:o:rm:=a:'i:on=========== ~

Doe.no. AU-OI91-A /24-0cl-94

OPERATION
I.

Push 1st. eng.button on the OCP in 2.


engine room

79

RESULT
The push button light is turned off on
the OCP in the Engine Room. the
Cabin unit and the Bridge panel unit.

:D:a:la:C:h:I~"ef~2:0:0:0=-:o~p~e:,.,:a:ti~ng~ln~rfi~o:rma:::/::io:n===========~

80

Doe.no. AUOI9IA I 24-0el-94

6.

PROCESS MIMICS

6.1.

Selecting Mimics

QCP Layollt for Mimic and Process Control


Pushbunons used for one push Mimic
selection or Mimic System selection
There are two ways to select the DC 2000 Process Mimics:

One push Mimic selection


Mimic System selection.

The way of selecting a mimic is depending on the total number of mimics in the system.
and will be configured during commissioning.
The one push Mimic selection will display the mimic described on the pushbunon by one
touch of the relevant bunon,
All mimics in one system (i.e.
the Mimic System selection.

Balla~t

System) may be covered by one single button using

:D:a:l:a:C:h:ie:::1:=:2:=:0:0:0=-:O:p:e:r:au:':ng=:l:nfi:o:T:m:a:l:io:n============ ~

Doe.no. AUOI91A /24-0et-94


6.1.1.

One Push Selection

OPERATION
I.

6.1.2.

81

Push the OCP button labeled with 2.


the relevant descritpion.

RESULT
The push button light is turned on.
and the selected mimic will be
displayed.

Mimic System Selection

OPERATION

1.

Push the OCP button labeled with 2.


the relevant system descritpion.

3.

Push the Next or Previous Page


bUllons until the required mimic is
displayed

4.

Select any other functions. using the


display

5.

Push the mimic system button 6.


previously selected (operation I)

RESULT
The push button light is rumed on,
and a mimic in the selected system
will be displayed.

The mimic last displayed (operation


3) will automatically be selected.

:::D:U:t:UC::h:i1e::2:o:0:0=.:o=p:e:,.,:u:ti:n:g:/:nfi=o=r:::ma=t:io:n============~

82

Doe.no. AU0191A /240e/94

7.

MIMIC PROCESS CONTROL

7.1.

Introduction

The DC 2000 Man Machine Interface for Process Control is divided into

Standard MMI for Process Control


Customized MM! for Process Control

Standard MM! for Process Control includes operation on all Standard Symbols for
Mimics (System Description Section 5.5) and is described below.
Customized MM! for Process Control will be project dependent and described in the
Project documentation.
The DC 2000 is divided into several screens or functional text areas :

Main Screen
Function Screen
Alarm Screen

Clock Screen
Title Screen

The different screens are situated like this


TItle
NORCONTROl
Automation

TAG

Cbck

TLE

TAGDESCR. FUNC

STATUS
AND

TAG
TAG
r.:

TAGOESCR.
TAGDESCR.
TAGOESCR.

Function Screen

In the procedures Standard MM! for Process Control the column "Status / Command"
refers to the Function Screen.

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

Doe.no. AU-0191-A 124-0et-94

83

(Intentionally left blank)

:D: : a:ta:C:h:i:ef:2::0:0::0=-:0:p:e:r,:atl: n:g:l:n:!ji:o:rma::t:io:n===========~

Doe.no. AUOI91A /U-Oet-94

84

7.2.

Standard MMI for Process Control

7.2.1

Analogue \'alves

VALVES
(AnaJOl!uel
Svmbol

Tvoe
"Closed"

Remote
control valve

<5%
"Intermediate"

5 - 95 %
"Open"

Remote control
three-way valve

>95%
T
"Closed"
0%
"Open"

T50%
T

"Intermediate"

100%

:D:a:ta:C:h:I:"ef:2:0:0:0=-:o:p::e:r:a:li:::ng=.:ln:f<:o:rma::=:ti:on=========== ~

85

Doe.no. AU-OJ9J-A /24-0et-94

Operation
I.

Process
Feedback

Status / Command

Colour

BW005 BALLAST DlSCH. YAL YE I


Position: 0% CLOSED Setpoint: 0%
Enler new setpoint 0-100%:

F1:lshing

Position: 0% CLOSED Setpoint: 100%


Enter new se[point 0-100'10: lOO OPEN

Grey

Closed
0%

Position: 50% INTERM. Setpoint: 100%


Enter new setpoint 0-100%: 100 OPEN

Yellow

Intermediate
50%

Position: 100% OPEN Setpoint: 100%


Enter new setpoint 0-100%: 100 OPEN

Green

Open
100%

Position: 100% OPEN Setpoint: 0%


Enter new se[point 0-100%: 0 CLOSE

Green

Open
100%

Position: 50% INTERM. Setpoint: 0%


Enter new setpoint 0-100'70: 0 CLOSE

Yellow

Intermediate
50'70

Position: 0% CLOSED Setpoint: 0%


Enter new se[point 0-100%: 0 CLOSE

Grey

Closed
0%

Position: 100% OPEN Setpoint: 0%


Enler new setpoint 0-100%: 48%

Green

Open
100%

Position: 70% INTERM. Setpoint: 48%

Yellow

Inlermediate
70%

Position: 48% INTERM Setpoint: 48%


Enter new setpoint 0-100%: 48%

Yellow

Intermediate
70%

Position: 110% FAIL Setpoint: 0%


Enter new setpoint 0-100%:

Red

Valve position
feedback
outside range

Move cursor to the actual


valve

2.

Press Ihe "READ" button

To OPEN a dosed valve

3.

Press "["

To CLOSE a open vah'e

3.

Press "0"

To Enter a Intermediate
Setpoint

3.

Emer lhe selected Setpoint


and press "ENTER".

Enter new selpoint 0-100%: 48%

ERROR Messages

:D:a:t::aC~hl:'ef~2:00:0=-:0:p~e:r,:a:ti:n~g:l:nfi~o:rma::::::ti=on:===========:~

86

Doe.no. AU-0191-A /24-0el-94

On / Off valves

7.2.2

VALVES
(On/Om
Svmbol

Tvpe
Remote control
valve

Remote control
non - return
valve

Remote control
change over valve

"Closed"

"

"Open"

y
y"lntermediate"

DalaChiej2000 - Operating lnjormalion

87

Doe.no. AUOI9IA /240et-94

Operation
1.

Process
Feedback

Status / Command

Colour

BWOOl BALLASTTK I VALVE


Status: CLOSED

Flashing

Status: CLOSED
Command: OPEN

Grey

Closed

Status: INTERMEDIATE
Command: OPEN

Yellow

Intermediate

Status: OPEN
Command: OPEN

Green

Open

Status: OPEN
Command: CLOSE

Green

Open

Status: INTERMEDIATE
Command: CLOSE

Yellow

lntcnnediate

Status: CLOSED
Command: CLOSE

Grey

Closed

Status: FAIL
Command: CLOSE

Red

Valve Limitswitches short

Move cursor to the aclUaJ


valve

2.

Press the "READ" button

To OPEN a closed valve

3.

Press "I"

To CLOSE a open valve

3.

Press '"0"'

ERROR l\Iessa~es

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

88

Doe.no.

7.2.3

AU-OI91-A /24-0ct-94

Breakers / Switches

BREAKERS/

SWITCHES
Svmbol

o-----<l

/0

DQ

TVDe
Breaker

Switch

=D:: a: :ta:C:=hl:"ef=:20:0:0=-=o:p:e:r:a:ti:ng=ln='fi=o:rm=a:ti:on===========~

89

Doe.no. AU0191A 124-0et-94

Operation
I.

Mow cursor to the actual


breaker / switch

2.

Press the "READ" bUllon

Process
Feedback

Status I Command

Colour

CBOO5 6.6kV MSB STBD BUSTlE


Status: DISCONNECTED

Flashing

Status: DISCONNECT
Command: CONNECT

No iodic.

Disconnected

Status: INTER MEDIATE


Command: CONNECT

No iodic

Intermediate

Status: CONNECT
Command: CONNECT

Indicated

Connected

Status: CONNECT
Command: DISCONNECT

Indicated

Connected

Status: INTEKMEDlATE
Command: DISCONl'.'ECT

No indic.

Inlcmlcdialc

Status: DISCONNECTD
Command: DISCONNECT

No indic

Disconnected

Status: FAIL
Command: CONNECT

Red

Breaker I
switch Iimi(switches short

To CONNECT a disconnected
breaker I switch

3.

Press "I"

To DISCONNECT a
connected breaker I switch

3.

Press "0"

ERROR Messages

90

Doc.no. AU-OI9IA /240ct-94

7.2.4

Pumps / Compressors / Fans

7.2.4.1

Single Pumps / Compressors I Fans

SINGLE P U M PS,
COMPRESSORS & FANS
Svmbol
Tvne
Controllable
One speed pump

Controllable
One speed fan or
compressor

The following terminology is used for single pumps. compressors and fans:
DEVICE
AUTOREMOTE-

Common name used for pumps. compressors or fans


MANUAL mode
LOCAL control

AUTO:

The device is in auto mode. i.e. different kinds of special logic.


usually for autor.mtic stan / stop of the device is activated.

MANUAL:

The pump is in manual mode. i.e. all speci:ll "auto" logic disabled.

REMOTE:

The REMOTE/LOCAL switch on the local cabinet / staner unit set


to remote control.

LOCAL:

The REMOTE/LOCAL switch on the local cabinet / staner unit set


to local control.

RESET :

If the system detects a TRIP of the device (device stops without


SlOp command) a TRIP alarm will be generated. The operator has to
RESET the device when an alarm occures

:D:a:ta:C::hl:::'ef::2:0:00::-=O:p:e:ra:tl:'n:g::ln:'fi:o:r:ma:=t:::io:n============ lfQQ

Doe.no. AU-O/9/A / UOel-94

Operation
1.

9/

Status rCommand

Colour

PUOO) La TRANSFER PUMP


Status: STOPPED MAN REMOTE

FI",hing
grey

PUOO5 LO TRANSFER PUMP


StalUs: STOPPED MAN LOCAL

Flashing
white

Process
Feedback

Move cursor to the actuaJ


(device)pump.
f,Ul
or

compressor

2.

Press the "READ" hutton

Not running
Remote
and
possible
to
operate
No automatic
functions

Not running
Local and not
possible
to

operare
No automatic
functions
To START a device

3.

Press '"I"'

Status: STOPPED MAN REMOTE


Command: START

Grey

Not running

Status: RUNNING MAN REMOTE


Command: START

Green

Running

Status: RUNNING MAN REMOTE


Command: STOP

Green

Running

Status: STOPPED MAN REMOTE


Command: STOP

Grey

Not running

Status: STOPPED MAN REMOTE


Command: RESET

Red

Tripped
Trip a1anm

Status: STOPPED MAN REMOTE


Comm'Uld: RESET

Grey

Not running

To STOP a device

3.

Press "0"

To RESET a device

3.

Press "RESET"

:D:Q:I:Q:C:h:ie:if:2:o:0:0:-:::o:p:e:"':Q:ti:ng: :/:nfi:o:r:ma=I:io:n============~

Doe.no.

92

AU-0191-A

/U-Oel-94

Stand by Pumps / Compressors / Fans

7.2.4.2

S TAN D B Y P U MPS,
COMPRESSORS & FANS
Svmbol
Tvne
Controllable
Two speeds
HlGWLOW

Controllable
fan or compressor

The following tenninology is used for stand by pumps. compressors and fans:
DEVICE
MASTER AUTOREMOTE-

Common name used for pumps, compressors or fans


STANDBY device
MANUAL mode
LOCAL control

MASTER:

Nonnally one of the devices in a stand by pair will be running. The


running device should be selected as master.

STANDBY:

In a stand by pair of devices. one of the devices will be stopped and


in stand by mode. This should be selected as sttindby. The device
will start automatically if the stand by start criterias are fullfilled if
both AUTO mode and REMOTE control is selected.

AUTO:

The device is in auto mode, i.e. the master and stand by logic is
activated.

MANUAL:

The device is in manual mode, i.e. the master and stand by logic is
deactivated. Used when it is required to stan!stop devices and be
sure that no devices starts or stops automatically.

REMOTE:

The REMOTE/LOCAL switch on the local device cabinet / starter


unit set to remote control.

LOCAL:

The REMOTE/LOCAL switch on the local device cabinet / starter


unit set to local control

RESET :

If the system detects an device error alarm (TRIP / FAIL / STBYST


/ NONSTB Y), the operator ha~ to RESET the device.

:D:Q:I:Q:C:h:ie:i: :2=O: :O:O:-=: o:p:e: : T:Q:ti:ng::l:nfi:o:T:::m=Q:I:io=n============~

93

Doe.no. AUOI9IA / U-Oet94

Operation
I.

Status / Command

Colour

Process
Feedback

PUOO5 LO TRANSFER PUMP


Status: STOPPED MASTER MAN REMOTE

Flashing

NOI

Move cursor to the


actual (device) stand
by pump. fan or

compressor
2.

Press the
button

"READ"

running
Remote and

pnssible to
operate
No stand by
logic

Not running

PUOO5 LO TRANSFER PUMP


StaIus: STOPPED MASTER MAN LOCAL

Flashing

Status: STOPPED MASTER MAN REMOTE


Command: AUTO

Grey

No stand by
logic enabled

Status: STOPPED MASTER AUTO REMOTE


Command: AUTO

Grey

Stand by logic
enabled

Statns: STOPPED STANDBY AUTO REMOTE


Command: MAN

Yt:Uow

Stand by logic
enabled

Status: STOPPED STANDBY MAN REMOTE


Command: MAN

Grey

No stand by
logic enabled

Status: STOPPED MASTER AUTO REMOTE


Command: STANDBY

Grey

Status: STOPPED STANDBY AUTO REMOTE


Command: STANDBY

Yellow

Local and nnt


possible to
operate
No stand by
logic

Enabling the AUTO mode

3.

Press "AUTO/MAN."
button

Disabling the AUTO mode


(enabling MANUAL mode)
Press "AUTO/MAN."
3.
button

Selecting Stand By device

3.

Press "I.ST STAND


BY" button

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

Stand by logic
and device
enabled

Doe.no. AUOI9IA /U-Oet-94

94

Selecting Master de"ice


3,

Press the "MASTER"


button

Stalus:RUNNING STANDBY AUTO REMOTE


Command: MASTER

Green

Status:RUNNING MASTER AUTO REMOTE


Command: MASTER

Green

Master logic
and device

enabled
To START a device
See 7.5.4.1
To STOP a device in
MANUAL mode

See 7.5.4.1

To STOP a Stand by device


in AUTO mode

3.

4,

Press "AUTO/MAN,"
bUllon

Status:RUNNING STA1\'DBY AUTO REMOTE


Command: MAN

Yellow

Stand by logic
enabled

Status: RUNNING STANDBY MAN REMOTE


Command: MAN

Grey

Stand by lngic
disabted

Status: RUNNING STANDBY MAN REMOTE


Command: STOP

Green

Running

Status: STOPPED STM'DBY MAN REMOTE


Command: STOP

Grey

Not running

"READ"

bunon

PUOO5 LO TRANSFER PUMP


Status: STOPPED STANDBY AUTO REMOTE

Flashiog
yellow

Press "AUTO/MAN:'
bullon

Status: STOPPED STANDB Y AUTO REMOTE


Command: MAN

Yellow

Stand by logic
enabled

Status: STOPPED STANDBY MAN REMOTE


Command: MAN

Grey

Stand by logic
disabled

Press "0"

To STOP a Master device


in AUTO mode

1.

Move cursor to the


device acting as Stand
by

2.

3.

4.

Press

the

Move cursor to the


running as

device
Master

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

95

Doe.no. AU-0191-A 124-0et-94

5.

Press

the

"READ"

button
6.

Press "'0"'

PUOO5 LO TRANSFER PUMP


Status:RUNNING MASTER AUTO REMOTE

Flashing
green

Status: RUNNING MASTER AUTO REMOTE


Command: STOP

Green

Running

Status: STOPPED MASTER AUTO REMOTE


Command: STOP

Grey

NOI

Status: STOPPED MASTER AUTO REMOTE


Command: RESET

Red

Tripp"o
Trip alarm

Status: STOPPED MASTER AUTO REMOTE


Command: RESET

Grey

Nor running

running

To RESET a device

3.

Press "'RESET"'

Doe.no. AUOI91A IUOet94

96

7.2.4.3.

Two speed Pumps I Fans

TWO S P E E D P U MPS,
COMPRESSORS & FANS
Svmbol
Tvpe
Controllable
HIGH/LOW
Two speeds

R
CJ

Controllable
fan

The following tenninology is used for two speed pumps and fans:
DEVICE
AUTOREMOTE-

Common name used for pumps or fans


MANUAL mode
LOCAL control

LOWSPEED:

Device running at low speed.

HIGHSPEED:

Device running at high speed.

AUTO:

The device is in auto mode. Le. different kinds of special logic.


usually for automatic stan I stop of the device is activated.

MANUAL:

The pump is in manual mode. i.e. all special "auto" logic disabled.

REMOTE:

The REMOTE/LOCAL switch on the local device cabinet I staner


unit set to remote control.

LOCAL:

The RElvIOTE/LOCAL switch on the local device cabinet I starter


unit set to local control

RESET:

If the system detects a TRIP of the device (device stops without


stop command) a TRIP alarm will be generated. fhe operator has to
RESET the device when an alann occures

:D::::Q:tQ:C:h:i:ef:2:o:0::::0=.:::O:p:e:T:Qn:'n:g:/:n:tJi:o:Tma::t:io:n=========== ~

Doe.no. AU-OI91A /UOet-94

Operation
1.

97

Status / Command

Colour

ACOO7 BOlLER ROOM AIR OUTL. FAN


Status:STOPPED MAN REMOTE LOWSPEED

Flashing

Process
Feedback

Move cursor to the

actu::J..! (device) two


speed pump or fJIl .

2.

Press the
button

"READ"

Not running
Remote and
possible 10

operate
Running in
lawspeed
No logic
ACOO7 BOILER ROOM AIR OUTL. FAN
Status: STOPPED MAN LOCAL LOWSPEED

Flashing

Not running
Local and nOI
possible to

operate
Running in
highspeed
No logic
Enabling the AUTO mode
S.. 7.5.4.3
Disabling the AUTO mode
(enabling MANUAL mode)

See 7.5.4.3

To START a device

See 7.5.4.1

To STOP a device

See 7.5.4.1

Enabling HIGHSPEED
3.

Press

"HIGH/LOW"

button

Enablin~

3.

Slatus:RUNNING MAN REMOTE LOWSPEED


Command: HIGHSPEED

Green

Status: RUNNING MAN REMOTE HIGHSPEED


Command: HIGHSPEED

Green

Slatus:RUNNING MAN REMOTE HIGHSPEED


Command: LOWSPEED

Green

Stalus: RUNNING MAN REMOTE LOWSPEEO


Command: LOWSPEED

Green

Running
lowspeed
Running
highspeed

LOWSPEED

Press
bulton

"HIGH/LOW"

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

Running
highspeed
Running
lowspeed

Doe.no. A UOI91-A 124-0et-94

98

To RESET a d... ice

3.

Press "RESET"

StalUs: STOPPED MAN REMOTE HIGHSPEED


Command: RESET

Red

Tripped
Trip aJanm

Status: STOPPED MAN REMOTE HIGHSPEED


Command: RESET

Grey

Not running

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

Doe.no. AU-OI9I-A /24-0et-94

7.2.5.

99

Controllers

CONTROLLERS
Svmbol

Tvne

Controller symbol

r0
I
I

Controller
x indicates Type:
T-temp
L-level etc.

I
I

----&J:0
I
I

Controller
(with by-pass)

I
I

-+DG 1 LT FW
SETP.:
70.0

TEMP.:
68.0

2C

C-

DG 2 LT FW

2C

2C

VALVE POS.: 48.0

TEMP.:
69.0

VALVE SETP.: 44.0


I
I
I
I
I
I
VALVE POS.: 43.0

DataChief 2000 - Operating Information

Controllers in
Standard mimic

DGILTFWin
AUTO mode
DG2LTFWin
SEMI AUTO mode

Doe.no. AU-0191A /240et-94

100

CONTROLLERS
Standard Controller Menu
DG I LTFW
TECHNICAL RANGE
I - GAIN
2 -INTEGRAL
3 - DERIVAnON
4 - SETPOINT
5 - MODE
(0 - AUTO. I - SEMI AUTO)
6 - STATUS
( 0 - DEACTIVATED. 1 - WORKING)

0.0 - 100.0 DEG.C


3.5
150.0
0.4
70.0DEG.C
AUTO

WORKING

The following terminology is used for controllers:


AUTOWORKING -

SEMIAUTO mode
PASSIVE/DISACTIVATED status

AUTO:

Controller active. regulating.

SEMIAUTO:

Controller active. not regulating. Controller output

WORKING:

Controller active "On".

PASSIVE /
D1SACTIVATED :

Controller Passive "Off'.

GAIN:

Controller Gain (0.0 - 100.0) [%]

INTEGRAL:

Controller Integral time ( 0.0 - 409.5) [sI

DERIVATION:

Controller Derivation brake off ratio ( 0.0 - 100.0 )

SETPOINT in
AUTO mode :

Controller setpoint while regulating

SETPOINT in
SEMIAUTO mode:

Valve setpoint while controller not regulating (0 - 100 )[%J

= Setpoint.

:D:a:ta:C: :h=i: fe:2:0:0:0:-:::0:p:er:a=ti:ng:=ln:::ifi:o:rm:a:t=io=n===========~

101

Doe.no. AU-0191-A / U-Oet-94

Operation
1.

Status / Command

Colour

DG 1 LTFW
Status: AUTO WORKING Setpoilll 70.0 DEG.C
Select Parameter to change (1-6) :

Flashing

Select "6 - Status"


by entering 6
<Enter>

Status: AUTO DISACTIVATED Setpoint 70.0 DEG.C


Select Parameter to change (1-6): 6

Flashing

Select "Status
On" by entering 1
<Enter>

Status: AUTO DISACTIV ATED Setpoint 70.0 DEG.C


Enter ON/OFF value 1 /0: I

Flashing

Process
Feedback

Move cursor to
the

actual

controller

2.

Press
the
"READ" button

Auto mode

Controller
active
Setp. 70.0'<:

Activating the
Controller

Controller nOl
active
Setp. 70.0'<:

Status: AUTO WORKING Setpoint 70.0 DEG.C


Enter ON/OFF valoe I /0: 1

Turning the Controller


11

Off"

The "AUTO/MAN" botton may be used

Select "5 - Mode"


by entering 5
<Enter>

Status: SEMIAUTO WORKING Setpoint 48,0 %


Select Parameter to change (1-6): 5

Select "Mode
Auto" by entering
o <Enler>

Status: SEMIAUTO WORKING Setpoint 48.0 %


Enter MODE value 1 /0: 0

Flashing

Semiauto
mode

Controller
active
Valvcpos
48.0%

Status: AUTO WORKING Setpoint 70.0 DEG ,C


Enter MODE val ue I /0: 0

Enabling SEMI
AUTO mode

AulO mode

Controller
active

See "Activating the Controller". Select "Statos Off' by


entering O.

Enabling AUTO mode

Auto mode

See "Enabling the AUTO mode". Select "Mode Semi


Auto" by entering 1

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

Flashing

Auto mode
Controller
active
Setp. 70.0'C

102

Doe.no. AU-0191-A I 24-0et-94

Operation

Status I Command

Colour

Process
Feedback

Changing GAIN,

INTEGRAL,
DERlVAnON or
SETPOINT

Select tile
parameter to be
changed by
entering 1 . 4
<Enter>

Status: AUTO WORKING Setpoint 70.0 DEG.C


Select Parameter to change (1-6) : I

Flashing

Change to new
parameters by

Status: AUTO WORKING Setpoint 70.0 DEG.C


Eoter GAIN (%) value 0.0-100.0: 3.6

Flashing

Au(O mode
Controller
active
Setp. 70.0'C

entering the new

value <Emer>

=D:::a=ta=C=h=I:ef=20=O=O=.=o~p=e=r::::ah=n~g=1n:!fi:::o=rma=t=io=n===========~

Doe.no. AU0191A 124-0et-94

7.2.6.

103

Generators

GENERATORS
Svmbol

Tv e

OCP Buttons

enerator symbol

lE] i.::.~ [I :. ~
~--!P~~P~~

The following terminology is used for generators:


AUTOSYMMETRICLIGHT -

MANUAL mode
ASYMMETRIC control
BLENDED fuel

AUTO:

MasterlStandby Modes
Load sharing and stanby functions active

MANUAL:

Semi AlIlo Mode


No load sharing or standby start request functions active.

MASTER:

The MASTER generator is responsible for frequency control while


other generators are started and have taken their part of the load.

l.ST STAND
BY:

The generator selected as l.st Standby will be started by the


MASTER GCU when its load exceeds a pre-set value or the
MASTER GCU fails (Shut down)

NEXT STAND
BY:

This generator will be started by l.st Stal1lJby

STOP
BLOCKED:

Stop Blocked Mode


This mode is used only together with a STANDBY mode. It
prevents load-dependent stop of the generator.

DataChief 2000 Operating Information

Doe.no. AU-0191-A /24-0el-94

104

SYMMETRIC/
ASYMMETRIC

Load Sharing Modes


Symmetric Loadsharing is automatically selected unless the
operatorselecl~ Asymmetric. AUTO mode function only.

LiGHT /
BLENDED

Fuel Selection

RESET

General Alarm Reset

Light fuel is automatically selected unless the operator


other. AUTO mode function only.

selecl~

Acknowledge and Reset alann message send to GCU

Operation

Status / Command

Colour

Process
Feedback

Setting STANDBY Prior it)"


I.

Move cursor to the fITst


standby generalor
(circle)

2.

Press the "READ"


button

AE 101 DIESEL GENERATOR I


Status: STOPPED

Flashing
grey

3.

Press the '" I.ST STAND


BY'" button

Status: STOPPED
Command: I. STANDRY

grey

4.

Flashing

Move cursor to the


second standby
generator (circle)

5.

Press the '"READ'"


button

AE30 I DIESEL GENERATOR 3


Status: STOPPED

Flashing
grey

6.

Press the '"NEXT


STAND BY'" button

Status: STOPPED
Command: NEXT STANDRY

Flashing
grey

7.

Repeat step 4, 5 and 6


for each remaining
generator required for

standby

=D:::a:ta=C=h:I:::"ef=2=OO=O=.=0~p=e:r::a:Ii:::ng~Jn:::'fi:o=r:::ma:::::ti=on============~

/05

Doe.no. AU0191A /240et94

Selecting Semi Auto Mode


l.

2.

3.

Move cursor 10 the


actual slandby or master
generalor (circle)
Press Ihe "READ"

Flashing

bUllOD

AE501 DIESEL GENERATOR 5


Status: STOPPED

grey

Press the "AUTO /


MAN" bunon

Status: STOPPED
Command: MANUAL

Flashing
grey

button

AE201 DIESEL GENERATOR 2


Status: STOPPED

Flashing
grey

Press the "RESET"


button if gen. not ready

Status: STOPPED
Command: RESET

Flashing
grey

Slartiog and Connecting lhe


MASTER generator
l.

2.

3.

Move cursor to the


actual generator (circle)
Press the "READ"

for start.

4.

Press the "START"


button

Status: STOPPED
Command: START

Flashing
grey

5.

Move cursor to the


actual breaker for
connection and press the
"READ" bunon

AE201 DG 2 MAIN CB
Status: DISCONNECTED

Flashing
grey

Press the activale or "I"

Status: DISCONNECTED
Command: CONNECT

Flashing
grey

Move cursor back 10 the


generator and press the
"READ" button

AE201 DIESEL GENERATOR 2


Status: RUNNING

green

Press the "MASTER"

Status: RUNNING
Command: ',1ASTER

Flashing
green

6.

button

7.

8.

button if g':.neralOf in

MANUAL mode

DataChiej2000 . Operating InjonTwtion

Flashing

Doe.no. AU-OJ9J-A /24-0e,-94

106

Selecting Stop Blocked Mode


l.

2.

Move cursor to the


actual standby or master
generator (circle)
Press the "READ"
bU(lon

3.

Press the "STOP


BLOCKED" bullon to
toggle Stop Blocked
Mode

AE601 DIESEL GENERATOR 6


Status: RUNNING

Flashing
green

Staws: RUNNING
Command: STOP BLOCK

green

Running in
AulO mode

Flashing

Fuel Selection
l.

Move cursor to the


actual generator (circle)

2.

Press the "READ"


button

AE601 DIESEL GENERATOR 6


Status: RlJNNlNG

green

Press the "LIG HT /


BLENDED" bullon to
toggle fue!type

Status: RUNNING
Command: LIGHT FUEL

Flashing

Running on

green

blended fuel

Flashing
green

3.

Flashing

Load Sharing Mode Selection

I.

Move cursor to tl,e


actual stand by or master

generator (circle)

2.

Press the "READ"


button

AE601 DIESEL GENERATOR 6


Status: RUNNING

3.

Press the"SYM /
ASYM" bunon to toggle
Load Sharing Mode

Status: RUNNING
Command: ASYMMETRIC

Running in
"SYM
METRIC"
Mode. and at
least two
generators
connected

:::D:::a:,a:C:::h:':'ef::2:0:0:::0=-:o:::p:::e:,,:a:tin:::g=:Jn:tJi:o:rmll::::':io=n===========~

Doe.no. AU-0191-A I 24-0et94

(Intentionally left blank)

DataChiej 2000 - Operating InjorltUltion

107

108

Doe. no. AUOI91A IUOcl-94

8.

SPECIAL FUNCTIONS

8. I.

Introduction

Functions for special purposes are included in some systems. Operating Informations on
the following and most used functions are provided here:

Deviation Parameter Configuration


Counters Display and Log
Noon Log
Fuel Economizing System
Level Gauging and Volume Calculations
Ullage Gauging, Volume - and API Calculations

Other functions will be described in the project documentation.

8.2.

Deviation Parameter Configuration

NORCONllWL
Autom31ion
EXOl6

11-08-93
12:30:16

DEVlATION LIMITS PAGE I OF I


A VERAGE ME CYL I - 6

357 DEG.C

Limit for alann blocking

200 DEG.C

limit for mean temperature high al3ffil

450 DEG.C

Deviation Limits:
at low temperature:
at high lemper.uure:
Current deviation Limit:

20 DEG.C
5 DEG.C
10.5 DEG.C

Profile correction....................................

............. ........ ..............

Cylinder:

355

358

367

-I

Corrected values:

357

357

Current deviation:

Measured values:
Correction;

...

........... ... ....... ............. ....................


5

348

354

360

-10

-3

357

357

357

357

AUTO
MAN

:D:a:l:a:C:h:ieif:::2:0:0:0=.:o:p:e:,,:a:ti:ng=l=nfi=o:r:ma=I=io:n============~

Doe.no. AU-0191A /24-0et-94

OPERATION

109

RESULT

1.

Use the arrow key to highlight the 2.


limit for alarm blocking. press enter

Enter new value: is displayed in the


lower left.

3.

Read in the new value. press enter

The new value will be updated on


the screen

4.

The same procedure is used to change other values.

DataChiej 2000 . Operating InjortTUltion

HO

Doe.no. AU-OI9I-A IU-Oet-94

8.3.

Counters Display

NORCONllWL
AUlOmation

11-08-93
12,30,16

COUNTERS DISPLAY 1 OF I

Tagn::l.m~

Tag description

$1.:LIusCoun(er

L0025
F0036
F0038
FW006
SW046

L.O. PUMP NO.!


F.O. PRESS PUMP NO.2
F.O. CIRC. PUMP NO.2
F.W. PUMP NO.I
S.W. PUMP NO.2

COUNTER
COUNTER
COUNTER
COUNTER
COUNTER

lap counter

40.00
2-t.OO

31.00
47.00
38.21

700.00
650.00
650.00
900.00
850.00

Reset all counters

Reset all

lap counters

Doe.no. AUOI91A /UOel94

HI

This function will display counters for pumps. Main Engine etc.

OPERATION
I.

Press Counters Display

3.

A counter value may be changed by


using the arrow keys to highlight it
and pressing ENTER to address it.

RESULT
2.

The Counters are displayed

It is possible to reset the counters. provided "Reset Counter" mode is enabled. Refer to

section 2.2.17.1 for details.

:D=a=l=aC=h::ie~f=2=O=O=O=.=o~p=e=r=a=ti=n~g:::/::nfi=o:r=ma=II:'o=n============~

Il2

Doe.no. AUOJ9JA /24-0el-94

8.3.1.

Counters Log

MI5 EAGLE
KAlDNES
COUNTERS lOG

NORCONTROl AUTOMATION NS
HUll NO: 10
93-12-27 21:19:19

Tagname

Tag descriplion

Status

lO025
FOO36
FOO38
FW006
SW046

L.O. PUMP 1'10.1


F.Il. PRESS PUMP NO.2
F.O. CIRC. PUMP 1'10.2
F.W. PUMP NO.I
S.W. PUMP NO.2

COUNTER
COUNTER
COUNTER
COUNTER
COUNTER

DC2000
PAGE 1

Cuunter

Lap cnunter

40.00
24.00
31.00
47.00
38.21

700.00
650.00
650.00
900.00
850.00

Doe.no. AU-0191A IUOel94

OPERATION
1.

Press System Infonnation Display

3.

Select Counters log by using


arrow key. then press enter

5.

Select I to get a printout

113

RESULT
2.

the 4.

DalaChief 2000 - Operating InforTTUllion

The System Infonnation Display is


displayed
A prompt to activate Counters
log(l =on. O=Off) at the bottom left
of the display.

114

Doe.no. AU-OI9I-A / U-Oet-94

8.4.

Noon Log

SORCONTROL ALIO~lAnOI" A/$


HULL NO: 10
93-12-27 1:::16:58

MtS EAGLE
KJ\l.DJ\'ES
l"OOS LOG
3gnamc:
."\\'001

pvOO'
pvOOJ
pvOO4
pvOO5
pvOO6

DC2000
PAGE J

Tag DC'scriplion

Eng.unil

[6:00

20:00

00:00

{W:oo

0$:00

12:00 Low.Lim. Hi.Lin

FW. COOUSG CYL.f"O.1

DEG.C

61:00

62:00

61:00

59:00

60;00

60;00

(90

COOU~G CY1..:"OO.2

DEG.C

60:00

60:00

61:00

60:00

61:00

61:00

(90

F.W, COOUS'G eL.SO.3

DEG.C

63:00

60:00

62:00

59:00

60:00

60:00

(90

coausa CYLNO.4

DEG.C

62:00

61:00

62:00

59:00

61:00

62:00

(90

E\\', COOUSG CYL.KO.5

DEG.C

60:00

62:00

62:00

59:00

60:00

61:00

(90

EW. CQOU'iG CYL.NO.6

DEG.C

59:00

60:00

60:00

59:00

60:00

60:00

(90

FW.

F.W,

VOYAGE J\'O:.L17'--_ _

FROM: HomED? \1

TO: O;;.,! v,mOB

DUfY ENOP.-.liR: Dry vm RRQW!\i

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

Doe.no. AU-O/9/A I 24-0et-94

RESULT

OPERATION
I.

Select Noonlog push button

1/5

2.

A prompt at the bottom left of the


screen: Noonlog enable"l" disable
"0"

3.

Select I and enter for enable. and 0 4.


and enter for disable

When the noonlog is enabled. the


push-button light is on. The noonlog
is printed every day at noon.

116

Doe.no. AU0191-A IUOel-94

8.5.

Fuel Economizing System

NORCONTROL
Automation

PERFORMANCE MONITORING ROUNDffilP REPORT

Slart :

ll-Q8-94
12:30:16

94-08-16 17:38:40

Duration:

0.00) HOURS

Distance:

0.0 NMILES

ACCUMULATED POWER (MWh)


Shaft 1 :

0.00

Shaft 2 :

0.00

Total:

0.00

CONSUMED FUEL (Tons)

0.00

Specific gravity of fuel at 15 deg. :

1000000 KG/L

Reset round lrip report :

RESET

Enter new sp.gr. value:

MIS A...... ~"E SIF


HYUNDAI HEAVY !l'DUSTRIES CO.

FUEL MO:'\ITORli'G LOG


Roundlrip start
Duration
lime
dale
(HOURS)

92-10-23

08:59:25

255.0

~ORCO:-"'TROL AUTO~1ATIOS

AIS

OC 2000

HULL ~O: HHI06.


9-'..(1-'1917:09:11

PAGE I

Distance
(NMILES)

Acc.po.....er
Sh./(MIVH)

Ace.po.....er
Sh.2(MIVH)

Towl
po..er(MIVH)

Towl
fo.con.(TONS)

sp.graviry
(KGIL)

369.8

10.2

10.3

20.5

237.2

0.987

DalaChiej2000 . Operating Injor1TUllion

Doe.no. AU-OI9I-A /24-0et94

OPERATION
I. Select Fuel Monitoring push button

Il7

RESULT
2. The Performance Monitoring
Roundtrip Display is displayed

Change specific gravity


3. Use arrow keys to select specific 4. "Enter new sp.gr. value :"will be
gravity value and press <Enter>
displayed in the lower left corner.
5. Enter new specific gravity, press 6. The new specific gravity value will be
<Enter> to confinn the new value
displayed,

Reset round trip report


3. Use arrow keys to select "RESET" and 4, "Enter reset status : 0 - not reset. I reset" and "Warning! all accumulated
press <Enter>
data will be lost" will be displayed in
the lower left corner.
5. Enter I <Enter> to reset round trip 6. All accumulated values will be reset
and roundtrip report logged at the
report.
printer.

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

lIB

Doe.no. AU-O/9/A / U-Oet94

8.6.

Level Gauging and Volume Calculation

8.6.1.

Tank Display and Log

NORCONTROL
Automation
Tk
No

Tank
Name

Tank
Type

I
2
3
4
S
6
7
8
9
10

FOREPEAK
WATER B. I P
WATER B. IS
WATERB.2C
WATER B. 3 P
WATER B. 3 S
WATERB.4C
WATER B. 5 P
WATER B. SS
WATERB.6C
AFTPEAK
TECKN.FW P
TECKN.FW S
FRESH W. P
FRESHW. S
HFOTANK 1 P

WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
TF
TF
FW
FW
HO

11
12
13
14
15
16

ll-Q8-94
12:30:16

GENERAL TANK DISPLAY


Level
[m)

Filling
(%1

O.CXXJ
O.CXXJ
O.CXXJ
O.CXXJ
O.CXXJ
O.CXXJ
O.CXXJ
O.CXXJ
O.CXXJ
O.CXXJ
O.CXXJ
0.057
0.053
0.060
0.065
0.098

0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.4
1.5
0.0
0.0
0.2

Volume
(m3)
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
2.34
2.50
0.00
0.00
0.31

Weight

Sp.gr
(11m3)
11.02500
1.02500
1.02500
1.02500
1.02500
1.02500
1.02500
1.02500
1.02500
1.02500
1.02500

I.CXXJCXJ
I.CXXJCXJ
I.CXXJCXJ
I.CXXJCXJ
0.98000

[I)

0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
2.34
2.50
0.00
0.00
0.31

Enler new Sp.gr. value:


<Enter> = 1.02500

:\ORCOi'TROL AUTO~tA TION AJS


.fu1...L NO: HHI06-t

MiSANNESIF
HYU~DAJ

HEAVY INDUSTIUES CO.

TANK LOG
Tank name
'Ilcno
FOREPEAK
I
WATER B.I P
2
WATER B. 1 S
3
WATffi B. 2e
4
WATER. B. 3 P
5
WATER B. 3 S
6
WATFRB.JC
7
WATER. B. 5 P
8
WATER B. 5 S
9
WATER B.6C
10
11
AFl'PEAK
ltCKS.FWP
12
TECKN.FW S
13
FRE."iH W. P
14
FRESH IV. S
15
HFOTA\'K 1
16

Tank type
WB
WB
WB

9J-O-l- 19 17:09: 11
Level(m)
Filling(%)

WB
WB

0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000

\VB

0.000

\\'8
\\'8

0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.057

\\'8

WB
WB
'IF
'IF
FW
FW
HO

0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
lA

DC 2000

PAGE I
Volume(m3)

a.OS3

1.5

0.060
0.065
0.098

0.0
0.0

0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
2.3J
2.50
0.00
0.00

0.2

0.31

DataChief2000 . Operating Information

Sp.gnt/m31
1.0250

1.0250
1.0250
1.0250
1.0250
1.0250
1.0250
1.0250
1.0250
1.0250
1.0250
1.0000
1.0000
1.oo

1.oo

0.9800

Weight(t)

0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
2.3-1
2.50
0.00
0.00
0.31

Doe.no. AU-0191A /24-0et-94

OPERATION

119

RESULT

Change specific gravity


I. Select and press the "General Tank 2. The General Tank Display is monitored
Display" push button

3. Use arrow keys to select the specific 4. "Enter new Sp.gr. value :" and <Enter>
gravity value to be changed and press
= 1.02500 (or the last :.p.gr. value
<Enter>
selected) will be displayed in the lower
left corner.
5. Enter new specific gravity, press 6. The new specific gravity value will be
<Enter> to confirm the new value
displayed and used for level correction,
volume - and weigt calculation.
7. To enter a new specific gravity
identical to the previous one, press
<Enter> only and the value written in
the lower left corner will be used.
Activate Tank Log
I. Select and
press the "System 2. The System Infonnation Display is
Information Display" push button
monitored

3. Use arrow keys to select "Tank Log" 4. The prompt activate tank log (I =on) is
and press <Enter>
displayed in the lower left of the
display.
5. Enter I to start the printout.

DataChief2000 Operating Information

6. The message "Tank log activated" will


be displayed and the log printer will
start printing the log.

Doe. no. AU-0191-A /24-0et-94

120

8.6.2.

Level Correction Display and Log

NORCONTROL

Automation

1H1894
12:30:16

ULLAGE / LEVEL CORRECTION DISPLAY

Tk
No

Name

Tank

Tank
Type

VII/Level
(m)

Sp.gr
(t/m3)

sensor
Offset

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

FOREPEAK
WATER B. 1 P
WATER B. 1 S
WATERB.2C
WATER B. 3 P
WATER B.:; S
WATER B. 4 C
WATER B. 5 P
WATER B. SS
WATERB.6C
AFTPEAK
TECKN.FW P
TECKN.FWS
FRESH W. P
FRESH W. S
HFOTANK 1 P

WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
TF
TF
FW
FW
HO

O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ

1.02500
1.02500
1.02500
1.02500
1.02500
1.02500
1.02500
1.02500
1.02500
1.02500
1.02500
1.02500
1.02500
1.02500
1.02500
1.02500

0.083
0.084
0.089
0.135
0.130
0.136
0.130
0.140
0.130
0.130
0.075
0.057
0.053
0.060
0.065
0.098

Longcorr Transcorr
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ

M/S ANNE SIF

r-.;ORCOXTROL AUTOMATION NS

HYUNDAI HEAVY I1<DUSlRrES CO.


LEVEL & DRAFT CORRECTION LOG
Tank Name
T:mk Type
11<
I
FOREPEAK
\VB
WATER B. I P
2
'VB
WAlEB.IS
WB
3
WATERB.2C
\VB
WAITR B. 3 P
WB
5
WATER B. 3 S
6
'VB
WATCRB.4C
WB
7
WATER B. 5 P
\VB
8
WATER B. 5 S
\VB
9
WB
WATER B. 6C
10
AFrPEAK
11
'VB
TECK:".fW P
TF
12
TECK.,\'.FW S
TF
13
fRESHW.P
14
fW
fRESHW.S
15
fW
HFOTA...~K I
HO
16

HULL NO: HHIOM

O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ
O.OOJ

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

Sp.Gr
1.0250
1.0150
1.0250
1.0250

1.0250
1.0250
1.0250
1.0150
1.0250

I.02S0
1.0250
1.0000
1.0000
1.0000
1.0000
0.9800

Sens.Offs.
0.083
0.084
0.089
0.135
0.130
0.136
0.130
O.I~O

0.130
0.130
0.075
0.057
0.053
0.060
0.065
0.098

Longcorr
0.000
0.000
O.fKJO
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000

o.ono
0.000

0.083
0.084
0.089
0.135
0.130
0.136
0.130
0.140
0.130
0.130
0.075
0.057
0.053
0.060
0.065
0.098

DC 2000

9~-OJ-1917:09:11

Levellml
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000

Corrected
VII/Level

Transcorr
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000

0.000
0.000

0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000

PAGE I
Corr.Ull!lev,

0.OS3
0.084

0.(1\;9
0.135
0.130
0.136
0.130
0.140
0.130
0.130
0.075
0.057
0.053
0.060
0.065
0.098

121

Doe.no. AU-OI91-A /24-0et-94

OPERATION

RESULT

Activate the Level Correction Display

I. Select and press the "Level Corr. 2. The Level


Display" push burron
monitored

Correction

Display

is

Activate Level & Draft Correction Log

3. Select and press the "System 4. The System Information Display


Information Display" push button
monitored

IS

5. Use arrow keys to select "Level 6. The prompt activate level correction
Correction" and press <Enter>
log (I=on) is displayed in the lower left
of the display.
7. Enter I to start the printout.

8. The message "Level correction log


activated" will be displayed and the log
printer will start printing the log.

:D:a:ta:C::h:ie:'f:2:o:0:0==oO:p:e:r:a:ti:n:g:/:nfi:o:r:l1Ul=t1='o=n============~

Doc.no. AU-O/9/-A /24-0cl-94

122

8.6.3.

Ship DisplaY
.

NORCONffiOL
Automation

Name

1l-(J8-94
12:30:16

SHIP DISPLAY

Hull

M/SNONAME
IC01

Length pp

(m)

Owner

SHIPOWNERS LTD

Breadth

(m)

Totals of

Type

Crude Oil general

CR

0.0

0.0

Water Ballast

WB
FW
TF
HO

0.0
9.1
4.8
1.9

0.0
9.1
4.8
2.0

Fresh Water

Technical FW
Heavy Oil

Measured droughts (m)

Weight
(t)

Measured trim(m)

Aft: 3.38
2.23

$eo Spec. Grav. (11m3)

11.02500 1

Trim used for trim correction


Trim type MEASURED
Fixed tom (m)
O.CO

Act. Volume
(m3)

219.68
32.25
Net.Volume
15'C (m3)
0.0

US barrels
6O"F
0.0

Fwd: 1.15

Ust used for list correction


Ust type
FIXED
Fixed list (degl
O.CO

Enter new sp.gr. value:

OPERATION

RESULT

Activate Ship Display


I. SeleCI and press the "Ship Display"
push button

2. The Ship Display is monitored

=D:::a:la:C=hl:"ef=20:0:0=-=0~p:e:,,:atl:'n:::g=/n:ifi=o:rma=l:io:n===========~

Doe.no. AU-0/9/-A /24-0el-94

OPERATION

123

RESULT

Change Sea Specific Gravity


3. Use arrow keys to select the specific 4. "Enter new sp.gr. value :" will be
gravity value and press <Enter>
displayed in the lower left corner.
5. Enter new specific gravity and press 6. The new specific gravity value will be
displayed and used for draught
<Enter> to confinn the new value
measurement correction.
Change from Measured to Fixed Trim

and/or List Correction

3. Use arrow keys to select the Fixed nim 4. "Enter new fixed nim / list value :" will
be displayed in the lower left corner.
[m] or list [deg] value and press
<Enter>
5. Enter the new value and press <Enter> 6. The new trim or list value will be
to confinn it
displayed.
7. Use arrow keys to select "Trim type" or 8. "Enter I to enable fixed trim / list
correction:" will be displayed in the
"List type" and press <Enter>
lower left corner.
9. Enter I and press <Enter> to confum 10. Trim - / List type "FIXED" will be
displayed and the fixed value will be
your selection
used for trim / list corrections in the
level gauging system. Measured
draughts will only be displayed.
Change from Fixed to Measured Trim and/or List Correction
3. Use arrow keys to select "Trim type" or 4. "Enter 0 to disable fixed trim / list
"List type" and press <Enter>
correction:" will be displayed in the
lower left corner.
5. Enter 0 and press <Enter> to confum 6. Trim - / List type "MEASURED" will
your selection
be displayed and themea,ured value
will be used for trim / list corrections in
the level gauging system.

DalaChief 2000 - Operating Informalion

Doe.no. AU-0191-A I 240et94

124

8.7.

Ullage Gauging, Volume - and API Calculations

8.7.1.

Cargo Tank Ullage Display and Log

NORCONTROL
Automation
Tk Tank
No Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

11-08-94
12:30:16

CARGO TANK ULLAGE DISPLAY


Tank Ullage Act.Tmp Act.Vol FIlling
(m)
Type
('C)
1m3)
1%)

CARGO TK. 1 C
CAR= TK.2 P
CARGO TK.2 S
CARGO TK.3 P
CARGO TK.3 S
CARGO TK.4 C
SLOP TANK P

CR
PR
GL
CA
WB
BU
SL

10.820
10.840
10.840
10.860
10.860

....

ITITJ
15.0
15.0
15.0
NONE

4.430

0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
UQUID
0.0

Volume Vol15'C Weight US Barrels


(m3)
air(t)
corr.f.
6O"F

0.0
l.OCO:::O
1.OCO:::O
0.0
0.0
I.OCO:::O
0.0
00
....
CAR=
0.0

0.0
0.0
0.0

0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0

0.0
0.0
0.0

0.0

Enter new Tank Temperature:

<Enter> = 15.0

MIS

AI'~c

I'ORCOI'TROL AUTmlATIOI' A!S


HU1..L 1\0: Hl-UQ64

SlF

HYUNDAI HEA VY INDUSTRIES CO.


ULLAGE LOG
Tank

Th

No

l':ame

01
02
03
0"
05
06
07

CARGOTK.I C
CARGOTK.2P
CARGOTK.2S
CARGOTK.3P
CARGOTK.3S
CARGO TK." C
SLOPTAI'K P

DC 2000

PAGE 1

9-'-04-1917:09: 11

Tank
Tlpe
CR
PR
GL
CA
WB
BU
SL

Ullage

Act.Tmp

Al1..Vol

ImJ
10.820
10.8"0
10.840
10.860
10.860

['Cl

Im31
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0

I'OI'E

U30

0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0

L1Qum
0.0

Filling
1%[
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
CARGO
0.0

Volume
cord.
1.00000
1.00000
1.00000

......

Vol15

Weight

US Barrels

1m3]
0.0
0.0
0.0

airll)

6O'F

0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0

0.0
0.0
0.0

0.0

:D:a=ta::C::h=i~ef::2::0::0:0=-::o:p::e=ra=t1='n~g~1=n::,:ifi::or=T1Ul=t:io::n===========~

Doe.no. AU-OI91-A /24-0el-94

OPERATION

125

RESULT

Activate the Cargo Tank Ullage Display


1. Select and press the "Cargo Tank
Display" push bunon

2. The Cargo tank Ullage Display is


displayed

Change Tank Temperature

3. Use arrow keys to select the Tank 4. "Enter new Tank Temperature :" and
Temperature to be changed and press
<Enter> = 15.0 (or the last temperature
selected) will be displayed in the lower
<Enter>
left corner.
5. Enter new tank temperature and press 6. The new tank temperature will be
<Enter> to confinn the new value
displayed and used for volume - and
weigt calculation.
7. To enter a new tank temperature
identical to the previous one, press
<Enter> only and the value wrinen in
the lower left corner will be used.
Activate Ullage Log
1. Select and press the "System 2. The System Information Display is
Information Display" push bunon
monitored

3. Use arrow keys to select "Ullage log" 4. The prompt activate ullage log (I =on)
and press <Enter>
is displayed in the lower left corner of
the display.
5. Enter I to start the printout.

6. The message "Ullage log activated"


will be displayed and the log printer
will start printing the log.

::::D:a:l:aC::::h:::ie:'f::2::::o::::0:0:-=::O:p:::e:r:atl:'n:g=:ln::!fi:o:r:ma=I:io:n============

Doe.no. AU-OI9I-A /24-0et-94

126

8.7.2.

API Display and Log

NORCONTROL
Automation

11-o8-9~

TANK API DISPLAY

Tk Tank
No Name
1 CARGO TK. 1 C
2 CARGO TK.2 P
3 CARGO TK.2 5
~ CARGO TK.3 P
5 CARGO TK.3 5
6 CARGO TK.~ C
7 SLOP TANK P

Tank
Type
CR
PR
GL
CA
WB
BU
SL

Dens.vac Dens.air Dens.air Temp.(T) Dens.carr.t Dens.at


1S'C
oct.temp
PC
'C
1S'C

API

13000
30.00
30.00

....

12:30:16

0.87569
0.87569
0.87569
0.87569

0.87~6O

0.87~6O

0.87~6O

0.87~6O
0.87~6O

0.87~6O
0.87~6O

1.02500
LIQUID
CARGO

NONE

15.00

0.87460

0.=

0.87~6O

....

0.87~6O

Enter new API :


<Enter> = 30.00

SORCOSTROL AUTO~IATlOS NS
HULL SO: HHI064

MI5 ANNES1F
HYUNDAI flEA VY INDUSTRIES CO.

AP1LOG
Tank
No
Name
01
CARGOTK.I C
CARGOTK.2P
02
CARGOTK.2S
03
CARGOTK.3P
04
CARGOTK.3 S
05
CARGOTKAC
06
07
SLOP T"'''K P

11<

Tank
Tll'"
CR

PR
GL
CA
\VB
BU

API
30.00
30.00

9-l-0-l-1917:09:IJ
Dens.vac
Dens.air

IScC
0.87569
0.87569

30.00

.........

0.87569
0.87569

IY'C
0.87460
0.87460
O.S7-l60
0.87.160

SL

LIQUID
0.87460

The following abbreviations are used for types uf cargu (t'Ulk Iype):

CA

Descriotion
Generalized Crude Oils. can.!O
Generalized Products. cargo
Generalized Lub.Oils. car"o
Cafl.!o (general)

SL

Slop (mixture oil/water)

WB

Water Ballast

BV

Bulk Cargo

Code
CR
PR
GL

PAGE I
Dens.air

Temp.(T)

Toe

"C

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

Dens.con- .f

Dens.al
acltel11p.

0.87460

0.87460
0.87460

1.02500

NONE

DC 2000

CARGO

15.0

......

0.o00ooo

0.87460
0.87460

Doc.no. AUOI9I-A /24-0ct-94

OPERATION

127

RESULT

Activate the Tank API Display


I. Select and press the "Cargo API
Display" push bunon

2. The Tank API Display will be


displayed

Change Tank Type (Content)


3. Use arrow keys to select the Tank Type 4. "Enter new Tank Type :" and the
column and tank to be changed. Press
possible tank types (i.e. I = PR 2 =
GL 3 = CA ... ) will be displayed in the
<Enter>
lower left corner.
5. Enter new tank type and press <Enter> 6. The new tank type will be displayed
to confinn the new type.
together with the relevant parameters.
Density Calculations based on API Density

3.

API density is only applicable for the 4.


following tank types; CR. PR and
GL. Use arrow keys to select the
API column and tank to be changed.
Press <Enter>

5. Enter API and press <Enter> to


confinn the new value

"Enter new API ;" and <Enter> =


30.00 (or the latest API selected)
will be displayed in the lower left
corner.

6. The new API density will be displayed


and used for density calculation.

7. To enter a new API density identical to


the previous one, press <Enter> only
and the value wrinen in the lower left
corner will be used.
Density Calculations based on Density in Vacuum at 15'C

3.

Density in vacuum at 15"C is only


4.
applicable for the following tank
types: CR, PR, GL and CA. Use
arrow keys to select the Dens. vac.
15 QC column and tank to be changed.
Press <Enter>

DataChief2000 - Operating Information

"Enter new SPGR. 15 :" and


<Enter> = 0.87569 (or the latest
SPGR. 15 selected) will be displayed
in the lower left corner.

128

Doe.no. AU-0l9JA / UOet94

5. Enter Dens. vac. l5 QC and press


<Enter> to confinn the new value

6. The new Dens. vac. l5 QC will be


displayed and used for density
calculation.

7. To enter a new Dens. vac. IYC


identical to the previous one, press
<Enter> only and the value written in
the lower left corner will be used.
Density Calculations based on Density in Air at 15'C
3.

Density in air at 15 QC is applicable


4.
for all tank types except BU. Use
arrow keys to select the Dens. air
15 QC column and tank to be changed.
Press <Enter>

5. Enter Dens. air 15 QC and press


<Enter> to confinn the new value

"Enter new SPGR. 15Air;" and


<Enter> = 0.87460 (or the latest
SPGR. 15Air selected) will be
displayed in the lower left corner.

6. The new Dens. air l50C will be


displayed and used for density
calculation.

7. To enter a new Dens. air l5 QC identical


to the previous one, press <Enter> only
and the value written in the lower left
corner will be used.
Density Calculations based on Density in Air at Specified Temperature T
3. Density in air at TOC is applicable only 4. "Enter new SPGR. at tempT :" and
<Enter> = 0.87460 (or the latest
for tank type CA. Use arrow keys to
SPGR. at tempT selected) will be
select the Dens. air TOC column and
displayed in the lower left corner.
tank to be changed. Press <Enter>
5. Enter Density in air at TOC and press 6. The new Density in air at TOC will be
displayed and used for density
<Enter> to confinn the new value
calculation.
7. Use right arrow key to select the 8. "Enter new tempT :" and <Enter> =
Temp.(T) QC column. Press <Enter>
15.00 (or the latest temp.T selected)
will be displayed in the lower left
corner.

:D:a:ta:C:h:l:'ef=20=O:O=.:::O:p:e:~:a:ti=ng=ln=rji:o=rma=:tio=n===========~

Doe.no. AU0191-A /240et-94

129

9. Enter new temp. 1"C and press 10. The new temp. 1"C will be displayed.
<Enter> to confinn the new value
Density in air at 1"c, temp. 1"C and
density correction factor will be used
for density calculations.
I!. To have density correction at actual 12. "Enter new Dens.Corr.factor :" and
temperature density correction factor
<Enter> = 0.000000 (or the latest
ha~ to be speecified (density I QC). Use
Dens.Corr.factor selected) will be
right arrow key to select the
displayed in the lower left corner.
Dens.corr.f column. Press <Enter>
13. Enter new density correction factor and 14. The new density correction factor will
press <Enter> to confirm the new value
be displayed. Density in air at 1"C,
temp. 1"C and
density correction
factor will be used for density
calculations.
IS. To enter a new Density in air 1"C.
temp. 1"C or density correction factor
identical to the previous ones, press
<Enter> only and the value written in
the lower left corner will be used.

Density Calculations based on Density at actual Temperature


3. Density based on actual temperature is 4. "Enter new Dens.at acttemp.:" and
applicable for the following tank types:
<Enter> = 0.87460 (or the latest Dens.
CR, PR, GL and CA. Use arrow keys
at act. temp. selected) will be displayed
in the lower left corner.
to select the Dens. at act. temp. column
and tank to be changed. Press <Enter>
5. Enter density at actual temperature and 6. The new density at actual temperature
press <Enter> to confirm the new value
will be displayed and used for density
calculation.
7. To enter a new Dens. at act. temp.
identical to the previous one, press
<Enter> only and the value written in
the lower left corner will be used.

DataChief 2000 - Operating lnformlltion

130

Doe.no. AU-0191-A /U-Oet-94

Activate API Log


I. Select and press the "System 2. The System Information Display is
Information Display" push button
displayed.

3. Use arrow keys to select "APllog" and 4. The prompt activate API log (I =on) is
press <Enter>
displayed in the lower left corner of the
display.
5. Enter I to start the printout.

6. The message "API log activated" will


be displayed and the log printer will
start printing the log.

::D=a::t=a=C=h=ie~if=2=0=0=0=-=O~p::e:::r::a:::tin~g=l:nfi:o:::r:::ma::::t::io=n============~

Doe.no. AU-OI91-A/24-0et-94

(Intentionally left blank)

:D=a=ta:C:h:i:ef=2=O:O=O=-=o=p=e=~=a=tin=g=ln:!fi:o=rma=t:io:n===========~

131

Doc.no. AUOI94A /24-0ct-94

DataChief 2000

Maintenance

User Manual

Depanment/AUthJ2

~L-

alii

Ketil O. Paulsen

Kjell Arnesen

1995 Norcontrol as
All rights reserved
No pan of this work covered by the copyright
hereon may be reproduced or otherwise copied
without prior pennission from
Norcontrol as

::::M::::at:'n:::t::::en::a:n:ce==============~

:D:::a::la:C::::h::ie::::::
2o:o:0=-

Doc.no. AU-OI94A /240cl-94

DOCUMENT STATUS
Issue No.
A

Date/Year
24-0ct-94

Inc. bv
KOP

Issue No.

Date/Year

CHANGES IN DOCUMENT
Issue
No.

ECO
No.

Paragraph
No.

DataChiej2000 . Maintenance

Paragraph Heading!
Descriotion of Change

Inc. bv

Doc.no. AU-OJ94-A /24-0ct-94

ii

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section

l.

Page

Il'o"TRODUCTIOS .. I

2.

PREVEl'o"TIVE MAL"TEl'o"Al'o"CE

2.1.
2.2.
2.2.1.
2.3.
2.3.1.
2.4.
2.4.1.
2.5.
2.6
2.8.
2.9.

MCU Preventive Maintenance


OCP Preventive Maintenance
OCP Lamp Test...
WBU Preventive Maintenance
WBU Lamp Test
WCU Preventive Maintenance
WCU lamp Test
System Alarm Test
Test of Bridge Call to Duty Engineer
Test of ECR Call All Engineers
Printer Preventive Maintenance
Cleaning of Panels and VDU Screen

2
3
5
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
8

3.

FAULT FlNDIl'o"G

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4

MCU Fault Finding


OCP Fault Finding
WBU Fault Finding
WCU Fault Finding

2.7.

9
II
12
13

:D:a:ta:C:::h:ie:if:::2::o0:::0:::":M:::::a:in:t:en:a:n:c:e========= =====:~

Doc.no. AU-OI94-A /24-0ct-94

iii

LIST OF FIGURES
Figure
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

I Tighten MCU tenninals and plugs


2 Tighten OCP tenninal (XIO)
3 OCP voltage adjustment...
4 OCP Lamp Test
5 Tighten WEU tenninals
6 WEU Lamp Test...
7 Tighten WCU tenninals
8 WCU Lamp Test...
9 System Alarm Test
10 Test of bridge call to duty engineer
II Test of ECR call all engineers
12 MCU Card position
13 MCU Connections
14 OCP Board position
15 WEU Board position
16 WCU Board position

Page
2
3
3
5
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
9
10
II
12
13

:D:a:ta:C:h:i:ef:2:0:0:0:::-:M::al:'n:te:n:a:n:c:e====== ========~

Doc.no. AV0194.A I 24-Oct-94


1.

INTRODUCTION

System Maintenance infonnation is provided in two parts :

Preventive Maintenance
Fault finding

The Preventive Maintenance information describes. or refers to. all the maintenance tasks
required to be performed at regular intervals to ensure that the system is kept in good
working order.
All the operator's system test facilities, and a full test of the alarm system, are described
under this heading.
A major part of the Fault Finding infonnation describes how to locate faults that are
indicated by the failure of the alarm test. The remaining infonnation covers the other
fault symptoms an operator could observe.

2.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

The preventive maintenance tasks, their recommended


references to the procedures, are listed below.

repetition frequencies, and

DAILY:
a)
Panel Lamp/Function Tests
b)
System Alarm Test

Section 2.2.1, 2.3.1, 2.4.1


Section 2.5,

WEEKLY:
a)
Panel Cleaning
b)
MCU Fan Check and Filter Cleaning
c)
Watch Call Function Test

Section 2.9
Section 2.1
Section 2.6. 2.7

3-MONTHLY:
a)
Logging-Printer Maintenance

Section 2.8

]-YEARLY:
a)
Cleaning of Units

Section 2.1. 2.2

2YEARLY:
a)
OCP +5 V adjustment
b)
Check Plugs and Connections

Section 2.2
Section 2.1,2.2,2.3, 2.4

Note! See also in manuals/or SAU. SAX, LGV,Primer e.g.

=========== ~

:D:a:t:a:C:h:ie:f:2:o:0:o::.:::M:a:I:n:te:n:a:n:c:e=====

Doc.no. AU-OJ94-A IU-Dct-94

2.1.

MCU Preventive Maintenance

a)

Check that fans are running.

b)

Clean air filter

c)

For cleaning of the MCU. switch off power and use a vacuum cleaner to remove
dirt and dust. Be careful not to let the cleaner touch any electronic components.

d)

Tighten terminals and plugs


LPTl

COM3

PI'

COM4

P16.3

PIS

PlO

Wl'

WIO

W16.3

cc:M5

Wl5

W16.4

W16.5

24VOC

Fig.

I Tighten MCU terminals and plugs

:D:O: t: O:C: :h: :ie:if::2:::0:::0:::0=-:M=:o:i:n:te:n:o:n:::c::e================~

Doc.no. A U-OI94-A /24-0ct-94

2.2.

OCP Preventive Maintenance

a)

For cleaning of the OCP. switch off power and use a vacuum cleaner to remove
din and dust. Be careful not to let the cleaner touch any electronic components.

b)

Tighten terminals(X lO) and plugs(P 16)

- els 6161

+ + ~-

I" 6161
0

6161
+ +

~~ I~ 6161

fG
I
"

'==\

\
24VDC

Fig.
c)

2 Tighten OC? terminal (XlD)

5V Adjustment

Sv odjUlitment
for ProceSOClf card

11

o
Measure points, 1
meoue between 1
red and black I

Sv actustment
for Front
panel cord

Fig. 3 DCP voltage adjustment

:D=a: ta=C: :h: ieif: :::20=O:::O=-=M=a=in=te:::n::an::c::::e=========== ==~

Doc.no. AU-O/94-A /24-0ct-94

Check And Adjust of The + 5 V Dc Internal Power Supply Unit (PSU)


The 5V DC output voltage should be within 5% of its normal value (4.75 to 5.25V DC).
The output voltage should be re-adjusted if it exceeds 2'7o (4.9 to 5.1 V DC).
Use a digital voltmeter to mea,ure the output from the 5V DC internal power supply unit
(PSU). To do this:
I.

Set the voltmeter range to mea,ure 5V DC.

2.

Do not disconnect the Plug/Jack 17; the 5V DC power supply must be measured
and adjusted under its nonnalload. Connect the probes: Positive (+) red wire. and
negative to black wire (-); see fig. 3 at the previous page. The upper power supply
is for the processor board and the lower for the panel board.

3.

Read the 5V DC measurement.

4.

If it is necessary to adjust the 5V DC power. carefully turn the 5V-adjuster on the


5V DC power supply unit (PSU) until the measured voltage is within the mentioned
limits.

CAUTION
If the Digital Voluneter measurement exceeds 6.0V DC. the Power Supply Unit (PSU)
over voltage protection circuit may activate and crowbar the output to OV. This condition
may damage the PSU. If the over voltage protection circuit has crowbarred the output to
OV, proceed as follows:

I)

Switch off power.

2)

Turn the 5V-ADJUSTER fully counter-clockwise (anti-clockwise).

3)

Switch on power.

4)

Turn the 5V-ADJUSTER clockwise until the Digital Voltmeter indicates


5V O.05V DC.

5)

Over voltage protection circuit is reset.

6)

End of adjustment procedure.

DataChiej2000 - Maintenance

Doc.no. AU-OJ94A /24-0c/-94


2.2.1.

OCP Lamp Test

Fig.

4 QC? Lamp Test

OPERATION

I.

RESULT
2.

Press Lamp Test

All Lamps will be active

WBU Preventive Maintenance

2.3.

Tighten terminals and plugs

~~~"~-~-I;~~:~~!!~
00000

00000
+ ..... __

1 2

..

Fig.
2.3.1.

5 Tighten WBU terminals

WBU Lamp Test

Fig.

6 WBU Lamp Test

OPERATION

I.

Press Test

RESULT
2.

Lamps and buzzer will be active

:D:a:/a:C:h:i:ef:2:0:0:0=-:M::a:in:te:n:a:n:c:e============== ~

Doc.no. AU0194A /240ct94

2.4.

WCU Preventive Maintenance

Tighten terminals and plugs

I
(Op!.)
Fire

2
(Op!.)
Fire

alarm

alarm

input

input
(+)

(-)

3
(Op!.)
Ex!.
Horn
output

Fig.

2.4.1.

4
(Op!.)
Ex!.
Horn
output

RX

6
RX

7
TX

8
TX

10

DC

DC

24V
(- )

24V
(+)

7 Tighten WCU terminals

WCU lamp Test

lIMJ
&UT9!:r!A nON

OB~
Fig.

8 WCU Lamp Test

OPERATION
I.

Press Test

DataChief 2000 Maintenance

RESULT
2.

Lamps and buzzer will be active

Doc.no. AU-O/94-A /24-0ct-94

2.5.

System Alarm Test

Fig.

9 System A/arm Test

OPERA TION

RESULT

I.

Press Alarm Test

2.

Alarm
Group
Lamp
"System
Failure" will start flashing amI the
buzzer is activated.

3.

Press Alarm ackn.

4.

Steady light at the "System Failure"


lamp and buzzer is deactivated

5.

Press Alarm Test

6.

The "System Failure" lamp is


deactivated

2.6

Test of Bridge Call to Duty Engineer

Fig. 10 Test of bridge call to dllly engineer


OPERATION

RESULT

I.

Press Call DUly Engineer

2.

The Lamp "Call from Bridge" and


the buzzer is activated at the Duty
Engineers Cabin Unit

3.

Press Sound Off at Cabin Unit

4.

Buzzer is deactivated at the Duty


Engineers Cabin Unit

5.

Press Call Duty Engineer at the 6.


WCU

The Lamp "Call from bridge" is


deactivated at the Duty Engineers
Cabin Unit

:D:Q:tQ:C:::h:ie:1:2:o:0:0:-=:M:Q:':'n:te:n:Q:n:c:e===============~

2.7.

Doe.no. AUO/94A I 240et-94

Test of ECR Call All Engineers

l ~NG ~IEF 00
D. ~1H.
~
oa:
WATOi

WATcH

1ST.

2ND.
ENG.

EN~

DUff

ENG.

All
ENG.

EN~
~ DUff

ENG.
ON ouTY

DU

OUff

Fig. 11 Test of ECR call all engineers

OPERATION

RESULT

I.

Press Call All Engineer

2.

The Lamp "Call from Engine" and


the buzzer is activated at all the
Cabin and Mess Room Units

3.

Press Sound Off at respective Unit

4.

Buzzer is deactivated
Cabin/Mess Room Unit

5.

Press Call All Engineers at the OCP

6.

The Lamp "Call from Engine" is


deactivated at the Duty Engineers
Cabin Unit

2.8.

at

Printer Preventive Maintenance

Follow the procedures recommended in the printer manual


2.9.

Cleaning of Panels and VDU Screen

Panels should only be cleaned with a soft cloth moistened with warm soapy water.
The VDU should be cleaned using an anti-static screen cleaner.

the

Doc.no. AU-0194-A / Z4-0ct-94

3.

FAULT FINDING

3.1

MCU Fault Finding

li~i1IH}'{i\'iIIImrl
li,~jitiIMliWE;g?}'?iiWIUWii!

l!il@i~!t@~~!~gii@IIII ImiiIiiIIIMnl
!~@l\li~~!#1i~WlWi~l1,j~91';ilIIiIIiit?'WI

1!\i!1ili@~IItliiE!iiWiilllitlli'liII

Ig~iJi;#lii"iUIWiMIIm!iIiiMil
Img;~i'iii!iIiWiiIiiIMIIIMi'i.'.IiiiiiiMMil
li1iii~=~UIiIi liijiMIMiiiiil liiiMiiiH.itliiiiil
Fig. 12 MCU Card position

Fault

Probable Cause

Action

MCU does not work

Loose plug or wire (PlO)


Broken power supply

Check 24V input


Check internal power supply

Communication
failure with DBU's

Loose plug or wire (P l6A)


Broken communication board

Check plug and wirings


Change communication board

No picture at VDU

Loose plug (PI7)


Broken graphic board
Broken VDU

Check plug
Change graphic board
Change monitor

Printer will not print

Loose plug (PIS)


Broken printer board
Broken printer

Check plug
Change printer board
Change printer

Communication
failure with other
MCU(s)

Loose plugs (P30/P31)


Broken communication board

Check plugs
Change Ethernet board

: :D: O: t: oC: : h: ie1: ::::2:o:0:0:-::M:o:'::'n::te::n::o::n::c::e===============~

10

Doe.no. AUOJ94A 1240e/94

o
HOATENNCRNAY

lPT 1

CClM3

P18

P16.3

COM"

PRIMER

WlO

W16,3

COM5

P15

PlO

Wl8

Wl5

W16,4

W16.5

OC?

24VOC

Fig. IJ MCU COl/neetions

Da/aChiej 2000 Maintenance

11

Doc.no. AU-OI94-A /24-0ct-94

3.2

OCP Fault Finding


Power Switch

Fig. 14 OCP Board position

Fault

Probable Cause

Action

OCPdark

Loose plug or wire (PlO)


Broken power supply
Broken panel board
Broken processor board

Check plug and wiring


Change power supply
Change panel board
Change processor board

Communication
failure with MCU

Loose plug (PI6.3)


Broken communication board
inMCU
Broken processor board OCP

Check plug
Change board

DataChief2000 . Maintenance

Change board

12

Doc.no. AU-OI94-A /24-0ct-94

3.3

WBU Fault Finding

BOTTOM VIEW

ANEl CARD NA1E-22l

(Ul)

S1NQ..E BOARD CPU NAIE-no (U2)

/0 PO\\R MODULE NA1E-222 (U3)

"""---- 103.5

_-...I

Fig. 15 WBU Boardposition

Fault

Probable Cause

Action

WBU dark

Loose plug or wire (P 10)


Broken power supply board
Broken panel board
Broken processor board

Check plug and wiring


Change power supply board
Change panel board
Change processor board

Communication
failure with MCU

Loose plug (16.5)


Broken communication board
inMCU
Broken communication board
WBU (power supply board)
Broken processor board in
WBU

Check plug
Change board

DataChief2000 Maintenance

Change board

13

Doc.no. AU0194A /24-0ct-94

3.4

WCU Fault Finding


D1P..sv.1TCH
JUMPERS
0>
-;!;

!>

,0

I 1111

11

Fig. /6 WCU Board posirion

Fault

Probable Cause

Action

WCU dark

Loose wire(s)
Broken board

Check wiring
Chan{!e board

Communication
failure with MCU

Loose plug (P 16.5)


Broken communication board
in MCU
Broken processor board in
WCU

Check wiring
Change board

J)ataChie! 2000 Maintenance

Change board

Doc.no. AU-O/95-A f 24-0CI-94

DataChief 2000

Replaceable Parts

User Manual

Depanment/Au~

aa~L
o. Paulsen

KetiJ

1994 Norcontrol a~

All right~ reserved


No pan of this work covered by the copyright
hereon may be reproduced or otherwise copied
without prior permission from
Norcontrol a~

:D:a:la:C:h:ie:i:2:o:00:::-=:::Rep:la:c:e:ab:l:e:P::a:rl:S============~

Doe.no. AU-OJ95A /2-10et94

DOCUMENT STATUS
Issue No.
A

Date!Year
24-0ct-94

Inc. by
KOP

Issue No.

Date!Year

CHANGES IN DOCUMENT
Issue
No.

ECO
No.

Paragraph
No.

DataChiej2000 - Replaceable Parts

Paragraph Heading!
Descriotion of Change

Inc. by

ii

Doc.no. AU-0195-A /24-0cl-94

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section

Page

l.

IYfRODUCl107'

2.

MAJOR U:-'lTS ................... I

3.

RECO,\lME:"DED SPARE PARTS .....................2

4.

PRO(;RA:\l-PACKAGES

<h THE PROCESSOR BOARD (OCP) ....... 3

DalaChiej 2000 - Replaceable ParIs

Doc.no. AU-OI95-A /14-0ct-94

ill

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure
Fig.

Page
Layout of Processor Board NN-791. I2

DataChief2000 - Replaceable Parts

Doe.no. AU-0195-A 114-0el-94

1.

INTRODUCTION

This Chapter deals with the pans for the I'vICU. OCP. WBU and WCU that are
replaceable. and is dividet into:
Major Units
Recommended Spare Parts

2.

MAJOR UNITS

The following Spare parts are major units available f(lf the MCU:

Processor Board
Ethemet Board
Printer Board
Communication Board NA 1030.1
Controller Board (Hard And Floppy Disk)
Graphic Board
Power Supply
Fans

The following Spare parts are major units available for the OCP:

Processor Board (NN-791.12)


Panel Board NA 1012.3
Power Supply NA 1011.1

The following Spare parts are major units available for the WBU:

Panel Board NA lE 221.3


Processor Board NA lE 220.1
Power And VO Board NA lE 222.1

The following Spare parts are major unit, available for the WCU:

Panel Board NA 1014.8

DalaChief2000 - Replaceable ParIs

3.

Doc.no. A U-OJ95-A /24-0cl-94

RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS

It is recommended that the following amounts of the listed Spare pans are kept available
at all times. The NC-CODE listing refers to the NORCONTROL Spare parts code
number.
MCU
PART
NAME

RECOMMENDED
NUMBER

NC-CODE
NUMBER

Processor Board
Ethernet Board
Printer Board
Communication Board NA 1030.1
Controller Board (Hard And Floppy Disk)
Graphic Board
Power Supply
Fans

I each
I each
I each
I each
1 each
I each
I each
I each

4400471
4400227
44oo9

6200115
44oo7

3800001

OCP
PART
NAME

RECOMMENDED
NUMBER

NC-CODE
NUMBER

Processor Board (NN-79 1.12)


Panel Board NA 1012.3
Power supply

I each
I each
I each

6200219
6200109
6200106

PART
NAME

RECOMMENDED
NUMBER

NC-CODE
NUMBER

Panel Board N.\ lE 221.3


Processor Board NA lE 220.1
Power And VO Board NA lE 222.1

I each
1 each
1 each

6200094
6200091
6200095

PART
NAME

RECOMMENDED
NUMBER

NC-CODE
NUMBER

Panel Board NA 1014.8

I each

6200150

WBU

WCU

DalaChiej 2000 - Replaceable ParIs

Doe.no. AU-OI95-A / ]4-0et-94

4.

PROGRAM-PACKAGES ON THE PROCESSOR BOARD (OCP)

The Processor Board is fitted inside at the bottom in the OCP cabinet. These program
packages ml/st be re-inserted into the correct sockets on the new Processor Board.

Fig.

I LaYO/lt o/Processor Board NN-79I.l'2

Program packages and sockets are coded for fit.

UDl
UDS

UF6
UJ6
UJ7

Note:

UDI

UF6

=
=

UJ6 & UJ7


UD5

RAM (Random Access Memory)


Program package
Decoders DECII, ACKII
COlllains the systems parameters

:D: : a:ta:C:h: i:fe:2:0:0::0=-::R::e:p: la: c:e: ab: /:e:p:a: :rt:s=============~